WO2020199992A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020199992A1
WO2020199992A1 PCT/CN2020/080980 CN2020080980W WO2020199992A1 WO 2020199992 A1 WO2020199992 A1 WO 2020199992A1 CN 2020080980 W CN2020080980 W CN 2020080980W WO 2020199992 A1 WO2020199992 A1 WO 2020199992A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
data packet
terminal device
transmission path
network device
indication information
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/080980
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
王瑞
彭文杰
戴明增
曾清海
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2020199992A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020199992A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/02Arrangements for optimising operational condition
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/19Connection re-establishment
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/20Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/27Transitions between radio resource control [RRC] states

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and device.
  • the fifth generation (5G) mobile communication system has introduced a duplication operation on the radio access network (RAN) side.
  • the network device may configure a duplication operation for a radio bearer (RB).
  • RB radio bearer
  • the terminal device can receive the data packets sent by the sender through at least two different transmission paths, and the data packets sent on each of the at least two different transmission paths are identical.
  • the terminal device when the duplication operation is introduced on the RAN side, if the communication between the terminal device and the network device is abnormal, for example, the terminal device fails the integrity protection check of the data packet transmitted on one of the transmission paths Or when the primary cell (primary cell, Pcell) is abnormal, the terminal device will trigger the re-establishment of the radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) connection.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the re-establishment of the RRC connection includes cell selection and terminal device context removal, which takes a long time and easily causes a long communication interruption between the terminal device and the network device, which affects the user experience.
  • the present application provides a communication method and device, which help reduce the number of times that terminal equipment triggers the re-establishment of an RRC connection, thereby helping to improve communication performance.
  • a communication method includes:
  • the terminal device receives the first data packet sent by the first network device through the first transmission path, and receives the second data packet sent by the second network device through the second transmission path; and when the terminal device receives the first data Packet, perform an integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain a first check result; and when the terminal device receives the second data packet, perform an integrity check on the second data packet Protection check to obtain a second check result; then, when the first check result indicates that the first data packet integrity protection check succeeds, the second check result indicates that the second data packet is complete When the protection check fails, the terminal device sends first indication information to the first network device through the first transmission path, where the first indication information is used to indicate the integrity protection check of the second data packet. The test failed. Wherein, the first data packet and the second data packet are the same.
  • the terminal device may send the first instruction to the first network device through the first transmission path
  • the information enables the network side to perform corresponding processing. Compared with the terminal device triggering the re-establishment of the RRC connection, it helps to reduce the number of times the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection, thereby improving communication performance.
  • the terminal device receives a switching instruction sent by the first network device through the first transmission path after receiving the first indication information; the switching instruction is used to trigger the
  • the terminal device updates the key used for integrity protection and/or the algorithm used for integrity protection. This helps to improve the communication security of the terminal equipment and reduce the probability of failure to verify the integrity of the data packet.
  • the first indication information further includes information used to indicate the second transmission path, and/or a cell identifier corresponding to the second transmission path, which is consistent with the second transmission path.
  • the corresponding cell identifier is used to indicate the cell used for sending the second data packet. It helps to assist the network side to deal with the second data packet integrity check failure accordingly.
  • the carrier associated with the first transmission path is different from the carrier associated with the second transmission path. This helps to reduce the number of times that the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection when the integrity check of the data packet transmitted on one of the transmission paths on the associated different carriers fails.
  • the carrier associated with the first transmission path includes a primary carrier. This helps to reduce the number of times that the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection when the integrity protection check of the data packet transmitted on the second transmission path not associated with the primary carrier fails.
  • the first network device and the second network device are the same, or the first network device and the second network device are dual-connected.
  • the terminal device obtains the first check result, if the second data packet is not received on the second transmission path after the first timing period is exceeded, when the first When a check result indicates that the integrity protection check of the first data packet is successful, the re-establishment of the RRC connection is not triggered; or,
  • the terminal device After the terminal device obtains the first check result, if the second data packet is not received on the second transmission path beyond the first timing duration, when the first check result indicates When the integrity protection check of the first data packet fails, the re-establishment of the RRC connection is triggered.
  • the terminal device determine whether to continue to wait for the second data packet after receiving the first data packet.
  • the first timing duration is predefined; or, the first timing duration is configured by the first network device or the second network device for the terminal device. Help simplify the implementation.
  • the terminal device when the first network device is the master node, the second network device is the auxiliary node, and the first network device and the second network device are dual-connected
  • the terminal device triggers Re-establishment of RRC connection. Help improve communication performance.
  • both the first data packet and the second data packet include second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the data packet has undergone a copy operation and is received through different transmission paths. . It helps to ensure that the terminal device receives the first data packet and the second data packet separately from different transmission paths.
  • a communication method includes:
  • the first network device sends a first data packet to the terminal device through a first transmission path, and sends a second data packet to the terminal device through a second transmission path; the first data packet and the second data packet are the same;
  • the first network device receives the first instruction information sent by the terminal device, it sends a switching instruction to the terminal device through the first transmission path; wherein the first instruction information is used to instruct the second
  • the data packet integrity protection verification fails, and the switching instruction is used to trigger the terminal device to update the key used for integrity protection and/or the algorithm used for integrity protection.
  • the first network device can send a handover instruction to the terminal device when the integrity check of the second data packet fails, compared with the terminal device triggering the re-establishment of the RRC connection, this helps reduce the number of terminal devices. The number of times the device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection, thereby improving communication performance.
  • the first indication information further includes information used to indicate the second transmission path, and/or a cell identifier corresponding to the second transmission path, which is consistent with the second transmission path.
  • the corresponding cell identifier is used to indicate the cell used for sending the second data packet. It helps to assist the network side to deal with the second data packet integrity check failure accordingly.
  • the carrier associated with the first transmission path is different from the carrier associated with the second transmission path. This helps to reduce the number of times that the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection when the integrity check of the data packet transmitted on one of the transmission paths on the associated different carriers fails.
  • the carrier associated with the first transmission path includes a primary carrier. This helps to reduce the number of times that the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection when the integrity protection check of the data packet transmitted on the second transmission path not associated with the primary carrier fails.
  • the second transmission path is a transmission path between a second network device and the terminal device, and the first network device and the second network device are dual-connected.
  • the first network device configures the terminal device with a first timing duration, and the first timing duration is that after the terminal device obtains the first check result, the The maximum length of time for waiting to receive the second data packet on the second transmission path, and the first check result is an integrity protection check result of the first data packet.
  • the terminal device determine whether to continue to wait for the second data packet after receiving the first data packet.
  • the first network device sends a first data packet to the terminal device through the first transmission path; and after receiving the first confirmation response, it passes through all the data packets within a second timing period.
  • the second transmission path sends the second data packet to the terminal device; the first confirmation response is used to indicate that the first data packet is successfully received.
  • the first network device receives the first confirmation response, and if it exceeds a second timing period, cancels sending the second data to the terminal device through the second transmission path package.
  • both the first data packet and the second data packet include second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the data packet has undergone a copy operation and passes through different transmission paths. receive. It helps to ensure that the terminal device receives the first data packet and the second data packet separately from different transmission paths.
  • a communication method includes:
  • the terminal device receives the first data packet from the first transmission path; performs an integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain a first check result; when the first check result indicates the first data packet
  • the terminal device sends first indication information through the second transmission path, where the first indication information is used to indicate the integrity protection check failure and the information of the first transmission path.
  • the terminal device can send the first indication information through the second transmission path in the case that the complete success protection check of the first data packet fails, so that the network side performs corresponding processing, and the terminal device triggers RRC Compared with the re-establishment of the connection, it helps to reduce the number of times that the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection, thereby improving the communication performance.
  • the terminal device performs an integrity protection check on the first data packet at the PDCP layer of the packet data convergence protocol to obtain the first check result. Help facilitate the implementation.
  • the PDCP layer of the terminal device transmits second indication information to the radio resource control RRC layer,
  • the second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device has an integrity protection check failure on the first transmission path. Contribute to the terminal equipment for further processing.
  • the cell group associated with the first transmission path is the primary cell group MCG;
  • the second transmission path is a radio link control RLC bearer associated with the secondary cell group SCG of the split signaling radio bearer SRB1; or, the second transmission path is an RLC bearer of SRB3. This simplifies the implementation.
  • a communication method includes:
  • the terminal device communicates with the first network device through the primary cell and/or M secondary cells, the carrier of the primary cell is different from the carrier of each secondary cell of the M secondary cells; the M is greater than or equal to 1. Positive integer;
  • the terminal device When the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, the terminal device sends first indication information to the first network device through the N secondary cells of the M secondary cells, and the first indication information is used to indicate the primary The physical layer of the cell is abnormal; where 1 ⁇ N ⁇ M, and the N is a positive integer;
  • the terminal device receives, through the N secondary cells, a handover instruction sent by the first network device after receiving the first indication information, where the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to another cell.
  • the secondary cell when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, can send the indication information of the physical layer abnormality of the primary cell to the first network device, so that the first network device can cause the physical layer of the primary cell abnormality in the terminal device.
  • instructing the terminal device to switch to another cell it helps to reduce the number of re-establishment of the RRC connection and improve the communication performance.
  • the terminal device sends second indication information to the first network device through K secondary cells out of the M secondary cells, and the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal A candidate primary cell group of the device, where the candidate primary cell group includes at least one secondary cell in the M secondary cells, where 1 ⁇ K ⁇ M, and the K is a positive integer. This helps to assist the network device in determining the handover instruction.
  • the terminal device also communicates with a second network device, and the first network device and the second network device are dual-connected; when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, the terminal If the device cannot communicate with the first network device through the secondary cell, the device sends the first indication information to the first network device through a transmission path with the second network device. This helps the terminal device to send the first indication information to the first network device.
  • a communication method includes:
  • the first network device communicates with the terminal device through a primary cell and/or M secondary cells, and the carrier of the primary cell is different from the carrier of each secondary cell of the M secondary cells; the M is greater than or equal to 1. Positive integer;
  • the first network device When the first network device receives the first indication information sent by the terminal device through the N secondary cells of the M secondary cells, sending a handover instruction to the terminal device through the N secondary cells;
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal
  • the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to another cell.
  • the secondary cell when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, can send the indication information of the physical layer abnormality of the primary cell to the first network device, so that the first network device can cause the physical layer of the primary cell abnormality in the terminal device.
  • instructing the terminal device to switch to another cell it helps to reduce the number of re-establishment of the RRC connection and improve the communication performance.
  • the first network device sends second indication information to the terminal device through K of the M secondary cells, and the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal A candidate primary cell group of the device, where the candidate primary cell group includes at least one secondary cell in the M secondary cells, where 1 ⁇ K ⁇ M, and the K is a positive integer. This helps to assist the network device in determining the handover instruction.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device also communicates with the second network device, and if the terminal device cannot communicate with the first network device through the secondary cell, the first network device communicates with the first network device.
  • the second network device is dual-connected, and the first network device may also receive the first indication information sent by the terminal device through a transmission path with the second network device. This helps the terminal device to send the first indication information to the first network device.
  • the present application provides a device, which may be a terminal device, a device in a terminal device, or a device that can be used with the terminal device.
  • the device may include a processing module and a transceiver module, and The module and the transceiver module can perform the corresponding functions in the first aspect and any of the methods designed in the first aspect, specifically:
  • the transceiver module is configured to receive a first data packet sent by a first network device through a first transmission path, and receive a second data packet sent by a second network device through a second transmission path; the processing module is used to When the transceiver module receives the first data packet, it performs an integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain a first check result; and when the transceiver module receives the second data packet, Perform integrity protection verification on the second data packet to obtain a second verification result; then, the transceiver module is further configured to: when the first verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the first data packet is successful When the second check result indicates that the integrity protection check of the second data packet fails, the first indication information is sent to the first network device through the first transmission path, and the first indication information is used To indicate that the integrity protection verification of the second data packet fails.
  • the first data packet and the second data packet are the same.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive a switching instruction sent by the first network device through the first transmission path after receiving the first indication information; the switching instruction is used to Trigger the terminal device to update the key used for integrity protection and/or the algorithm used for integrity protection.
  • the first indication information further includes information used to indicate the second transmission path, and/or a cell identifier corresponding to the second transmission path, which is consistent with the second transmission path.
  • the corresponding cell identifier is used to indicate the cell used for sending the second data packet.
  • the carrier associated with the first transmission path is different from the carrier associated with the second transmission path.
  • the carrier associated with the first transmission path includes a primary carrier.
  • the first network device and the second network device are the same, or the first network device and the second network device are dual-connected.
  • the processing module is further configured to obtain the first check result, and if the first timing duration is exceeded, the transceiver module does not receive the second transmission path on the second transmission path. For data packets, when the first check result indicates that the integrity protection check of the first data packet is successful, the re-establishment of the RRC connection is not triggered; or,
  • the processing module is further configured to obtain the first check result, if the transceiver module does not receive the second data packet on the second transmission path if the first timing duration is exceeded, when the When the first check result indicates that the integrity protection check of the first data packet fails, the re-establishment of the RRC connection is triggered.
  • the first timing duration is predefined; or, the first timing duration is configured by the first network device or the second network device for the terminal device.
  • the terminal device when the first network device is the master node, the second network device is the auxiliary node, and the first network device and the second network device are dual-connected
  • the terminal device triggers The radio resource controls the re-establishment of the RRC connection.
  • both the first data packet and the second data packet include second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the data packet has undergone a copy operation and is received through different transmission paths.
  • the present application provides a device, which may be a network device, a device in a network device, or a device that can be used in conjunction with a network device.
  • the device may include a processing module and a transceiver module, and The module and the transceiver module can perform the corresponding functions in the second aspect and any of the methods designed in the second aspect, specifically:
  • the transceiver module is configured to send a first data packet to the terminal device via a first transmission path, and send a second data packet to the terminal device via a second transmission path; the first data packet and the second data packet The same; the processing module is also used to trigger the transceiver module to send a switching instruction to the terminal device through the first transmission path when the transceiver module receives the first indication information sent by the terminal device; wherein The first indication information is used to indicate that the integrity protection verification of the second data packet fails, and the switching instruction is used to trigger the terminal device to update the key used for integrity protection and/or to Integrity protection algorithm.
  • the first indication information further includes information used to indicate the second transmission path, and/or a cell identifier corresponding to the second transmission path, which is consistent with the second transmission path.
  • the corresponding cell identifier is used to indicate the cell used for sending the second data packet.
  • the carrier associated with the first transmission path is different from the carrier associated with the second transmission path.
  • the carrier associated with the first transmission path includes a primary carrier.
  • the first network device and the second network device are the same, or the first network device and the second network device are dual-connected.
  • the processing module configures a first timing duration for the terminal device, and the first timing duration is that after the terminal device obtains the first verification result, the second timing duration
  • the maximum duration of waiting on the transmission path to receive the second data packet, and the first check result is an integrity protection check result of the first data packet.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send a first data packet to the terminal device through the first transmission path; and after receiving the first confirmation response, pass the data packet within a second timing period
  • the second transmission path sends the second data packet to the terminal device; the first confirmation response is used to indicate that the first data packet is successfully received.
  • the processing module is further configured to receive the first confirmation response by the transceiver module, and if it exceeds a second timing period, cancel the transmission to the terminal device through the second transmission path Sending the second data packet.
  • both the first data packet and the second data packet include second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the data packet has undergone a copy operation and is received through different transmission paths.
  • the present application provides a device.
  • the device may be a terminal device, a device in a terminal device, or a device that can be used with the terminal device.
  • the device may include a processing module and a transceiver module, and the processing The module and the transceiver module can perform the corresponding functions in the third aspect and any of the methods designed in the third aspect, specifically:
  • the transceiver module is configured to receive the first data packet from the first transmission path; the processing module is configured to perform integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain the first check result; when the first check result indicates When the integrity protection check of the first data packet fails, the transceiver module is configured to send first indication information through the second transmission path, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the integrity protection check fails and the first transmission Path information.
  • the processing module is specifically configured to perform integrity protection verification on the first data packet at the PDCP layer of the packet data convergence protocol to obtain the first verification result.
  • the processing module when the first check result indicates that the first data packet integrity protection check fails, is configured to trigger the PDCP layer to transmit the second indication information to the radio resource control RRC layer, The second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device has an integrity protection check failure on the first transmission path.
  • the cell group associated with the first transmission path is the primary cell group MCG;
  • the second transmission path is a radio link control RLC bearer associated with the secondary cell group SCG of the split signaling radio bearer SRB1; or, the second transmission path is an RLC bearer of SRB3. This simplifies the implementation.
  • a device provided by an embodiment of the present application may be a terminal device, a device in a terminal device, or a device that can be matched with the terminal device.
  • the device may include a processing module and a transceiver module , And the processing module and the transceiver module can perform the corresponding functions in the fourth aspect and any one of the methods designed in the fourth aspect, specifically:
  • the transceiver module is configured to communicate with the first network device through a primary cell and/or M secondary cells, and the carrier of the primary cell is different from the carrier of each of the M secondary cells; the M is A positive integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the processing module is configured to send first indication information to the first network device through N of the M secondary cells when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, and the first indication information is used for Indicates that the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal; where 1 ⁇ N ⁇ M, and the N is a positive integer;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive, through the N secondary cells, a handover instruction sent by the first network device after receiving the first indication information, and the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to another Community.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send second indication information to the first network device through K of the M secondary cells, where the second indication information is used to indicate The candidate primary cell group of the terminal device, the candidate primary cell group includes at least one secondary cell in the M secondary cells, where 1 ⁇ K ⁇ M, and the K is a positive integer.
  • the device also communicates with a second network device, and the device and the second network device are dual-connected; the transceiver module is also used for when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, If it is not possible to communicate with the apparatus through the secondary cell, sending the first indication information to the apparatus through a transmission path with the second network device.
  • the device provided by the embodiment of the present application may be a network device, a device in a network device, or a device that can be used in conjunction with a network device.
  • the device may include a processing module and a transceiver. Module, and the processing module and the transceiver module can perform the corresponding functions in any of the above-mentioned fifth aspect and the method designed in the fifth aspect, specifically:
  • the transceiver module is used to communicate with terminal equipment through a primary cell and/or M secondary cells, the carrier of the primary cell is different from the carrier of each secondary cell of the M secondary cells; the M is greater than or A positive integer equal to 1;
  • the processing module is configured to, when the first indication information sent by the terminal device is received through the N secondary cells of the M secondary cells, trigger the transceiving module to report to the terminal through the N secondary cells
  • the device sends switching instructions
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal
  • the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to another cell.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send second indication information to the terminal device through K of the M secondary cells, and the second indication information is used to indicate the A candidate primary cell group of the terminal device, where the candidate primary cell group includes at least one secondary cell in the M secondary cells, where 1 ⁇ K ⁇ M, and the K is a positive integer.
  • the transceiver module may also be configured to receive the first indication information sent by the terminal device through a transmission path with the second network device.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a device that includes a processor, configured to implement the method described in any one of the first to fifth aspects.
  • the device may also include a memory for storing instructions and data.
  • the memory is coupled with the processor, and when the processor executes the program instructions stored in the memory, the method described in any one of the first aspect to the fifth aspect can be implemented.
  • the device may also include a communication interface, which is used for the device to communicate with other devices.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, circuit, bus, module, or other type of communication interface, and other devices may be Network equipment or terminal equipment, etc.
  • the device includes:
  • Memory used to store program instructions
  • the processor is configured to call instructions stored in the memory, so that the device executes any possible design method of each aspect of the method part of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute any one of the possible design methods of various aspects of the method part.
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a chip system.
  • the chip system includes a processor and may also include a memory for implementing any possible design method of the method part.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips, or can include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, including instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute any possible design method of each aspect of the method part.
  • FIG. 1a is a schematic diagram of a network architecture of a communication system according to an embodiment of the application
  • FIG. 1b is a schematic diagram of a network architecture of another communication system according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture of another communication system according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture of another communication system according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a device according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of another device according to an embodiment of the application.
  • At least one refers to one or more, and “multiple” refers to two or more.
  • And/or describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, both A and B exist, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects are in an “or” relationship.
  • the following at least one (item) or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or a plurality of items (a).
  • At least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c, or a, b and c, where a, b, c It can be single or multiple.
  • the embodiments of the present application can be applied to a communication system that uses multiple radio access technologies (RATs), dual connectivity (MR-DC) and/or uses carrier aggregation (CA).
  • RATs radio access technologies
  • MR-DC dual connectivity
  • CA carrier aggregation
  • the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to other communication systems that can send the same data packet through multiple transmission paths, which is not limited.
  • the MR-DC communication system may include a core network, a master node (master node, MN), a secondary node (secondary node, SN), and terminal equipment.
  • MN master node
  • secondary node secondary node
  • terminal equipment terminal equipment
  • the MN in the embodiment of this application can be referred to as the primary station, anchor, primary network equipment, etc.
  • the SN can also be referred to as the secondary station, secondary network equipment, etc.
  • the name is not limited.
  • the MN is a radio access network (RAN) device, which provides terminal devices with a user plane of a wireless communication air interface and a control plane (control plane) protocol stack terminations.
  • RAN radio access network
  • the SN is also a kind of RAN equipment, which provides terminal equipment of the user plane and control plane of the wireless communication air interface. It should be noted that the MN and SN may be RAN devices supporting different wireless communication technologies, or may be RAN devices supporting the same wireless communication technology.
  • the wireless communication technology may include, but is not limited to: global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access, CDMA), wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA), time-division code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA), global terrsetrial radio access (evolved universal terrsetrial radio access, E) -UTRA), next-generation wireless communication (next radio, NR), etc.
  • GSM global system for mobile communications
  • GPRS general packet radio service
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • WCDMA wideband code division multiple access
  • TD-SCDMA time-division code division multiple access
  • E global terrsetrial radio access
  • next-generation wireless communication next-generation wireless communication
  • the MN can communicate with the core network on the control plane and data plane.
  • the SN can communicate with the core network on the control plane through the MN.
  • the SN can communicate with the core network on the data plane through the MN, as shown in the network architecture shown in Figure 1a.
  • the SN can also communicate with the core network on the data plane, there is no need to pass through the MN, as shown in Figure 1b.
  • the RAN equipment in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as network equipment, access network equipment, etc.
  • the RAN equipment may be the RAN equipment in the fifth-generation mobile communication system (5th-generation, 5G), such as .
  • the next-generation base station (generation nodeB, gNB) can also be the RAN equipment in LTE, such as evolved node B (evolved node B, eNB), or radio network controller (RNC), node B (node B, NB), base station controller (BSC), base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved node B, or home node B, HNB), baseband unit ( baseband unit (BBU), transceiver point (transmitting and receiving point, TRP), transmitting point (TP), mobile switching center, cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN) wireless controller in the scenario, Relay station, access point, RAN equipment in the future mobile communication system or RAN equipment in the future evolved public mobile land
  • RNC
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application is a device with a wireless transceiver function, which may be called a terminal (terminal), user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), and mobile terminal (mobile terminal).
  • terminal MT
  • access terminal equipment vehicle-mounted terminal equipment, industrial control terminal equipment, UE unit, UE station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal equipment, mobile equipment, UE terminal equipment, wireless communication equipment, UE agent or UE Devices, etc.
  • the terminal device can be fixed or mobile.
  • the terminal device can support at least one wireless communication technology, such as LTE, NR, WCDMA, and so on.
  • the terminal device may be a mobile phone (mobile phone), a tablet computer (pad), a desktop computer, a notebook computer, an all-in-one machine, a vehicle-mounted terminal, a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, and an augmented reality (AR) terminal Equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving (self-driving), wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, wireless terminals in smart grid (smart grid), transportation safety Wireless terminals in (transportation safety), wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, cellular phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless Local loop (wireless local loop, WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (personal digital assistants, PDAs), handheld devices with wireless communication functions, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, wearable devices, future mobile communications Terminal equipment in the network or terminal equipment in the future evolution of the PLMN, etc.
  • wireless terminals in industrial control wireless terminals in self-driving (self-driving), wireless terminals
  • the network architecture of the communication system using MR-DC includes but is not limited to the following three types: EN-DC (E-UTRA NR DC), NE-DC (NR E-UTRA DC), NG EN- DC (Next Generation E-UTRA NR DC).
  • EN-DC E-UTRA NR DC
  • NE-DC NR E-UTRA DC
  • NG EN- DC Next Generation E-UTRA NR DC
  • EN-DC E-UTRA NR DC
  • Option3 series that is, the core network is an evolved packet core (EPC)
  • MN is a long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE).
  • RAN device for example, eNB
  • SN is the RAN device in NR (for example, gNB).
  • NE-DC is also called Option 4 series (Option 4 series), that is, the core network is 5G core network (5G core, 5GC), MN is RAN equipment in NR (such as gNB), and SN is RAN equipment in LTE (such as eNB) .
  • NG EN-DC is also called Option 7 series (Option 7 series), that is, the core network is 5GC, MN is RAN equipment in LTE (for example, gNB), and SN is RAN equipment in NR (for example, eNB).
  • the above-mentioned EN-DC, NE-DC and NG EN-DC are all dual connections of RAN equipment in LTE and RAN equipment in NR, which can be referred to as LTE and NR dual connections.
  • 5G also supports NR and NR. Dual connectivity, that is, both MN and SN are RAN devices in NR, referred to as NR-NR DC.
  • a terminal device can access at least one RAN device at the same time.
  • the RAN device is the MN of the terminal device.
  • one RAN device is a terminal device MN, and the other one or more RAN devices are a terminal device SN.
  • a RAN device such as an MN or SN
  • a split bearer for the terminal device.
  • the split bearer of the packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) terminated in the MN can also be called the MN terminated split bearer, or MN bearer for short;
  • the split bearer of the PDCP terminated in the SN can also be called SN terminated split bearer
  • the bearer can be referred to as SN bearer for short.
  • the split bearer can be understood as a radio bearer (RB) that can be associated with two or more transmission paths, that is, the data on a split bearer can pass through one or the transmission paths associated with the split bearer.
  • RB radio bearer
  • the maximum number of transmission paths that can be associated with a split bearer is related to the number of SNs that the terminal device accesses. For example, in a multi-connection scenario, a terminal device accesses one MN and one SN, and the number of transmission paths associated with a split bearer is 2. For another example, in a multi-connection scenario, if a terminal device accesses one MN and two SNs, the number of transmission paths associated with one split bearer is 3.
  • each of two or more transmission paths associated with the same split bearer is associated with air interface resources of different RAN devices.
  • the first transmission path can be associated with the air interface resources of the MN
  • the second transmission path can be associated with the air interface of the SN Resources.
  • the air interface resources in the embodiment of the present application may include one or more cells where a RAN device (for example, an MN or SN) provides services for a terminal device.
  • one or more cells provided by MN for terminal equipment can be called master cell group (MCG), and one or more cells provided by SN for terminal equipment can be called secondary cell group (secondary cell group). , SCG).
  • MCG master cell group
  • SCG secondary cell group
  • the air interface resources of the MN associated with the first transmission path can be understood as one or more cells in the MCG associated with the first transmission path.
  • the terminal equipment is connected to the MN and the SN respectively.
  • the MCG provided by the MN for the terminal equipment is MCG1
  • the SCG provided by the SN for the terminal equipment is SCG2.
  • transmission path 1 can be associated with one or more cells in MCG1
  • transmission path 2 can be associated with one or more cells in MCG2.
  • MCG1 includes cell 11, cell 21, and cell 31
  • SCG1 includes cell 12 and cell 22
  • transmission path 1 can be associated with cell 11 and cell 31
  • transmission path 2 can be associated with cell 12.
  • the split bearer may be a signaling radio bearer (signal resource bearer, SRB), for example, the split bearer may be SRB1, SRB2, or SRB3; for the user plane , the split bearer may be a wireless data bearer (data resource bearer, DRB).
  • SRB signaling radio bearer
  • DRB wireless data bearer
  • the same data packet can be transmitted on two or more transmission paths associated with a split bearer.
  • the data packet may be a radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) message. This helps to improve the reliability of communication between RAN equipment and terminal equipment.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the network architecture shown in FIG. 2 is a dual-connection architecture, and this application is also referred to as the first network device and the second network device as dual-connection.
  • the first network device and the second network device are used as the sending end device, and the terminal device is used as the receiving end device as an example.
  • the method of sending repeated data packets after the copy operation is introduced is described.
  • the first network device is MN and the second network device is SN; or, for terminal devices, the first network device is SN, and the second network device is MN.
  • a communication method includes the following steps.
  • Step 301 The first network device configures an SRB for the terminal device, where the SRB is associated with the first transmission path and the second transmission path.
  • the first transmission path can be understood as a first radio link control (RLC) bearer
  • the second transmission path can be understood as a second RLC bearer
  • the first RLC bearer is associated with MCG
  • the second RLC bearer is associated with SCG.
  • the RRC layer of the first network device transmits the data carried on the SRB to the PDCP layer of the first network device, and the PDCP layer of the first network device processes the received data to obtain the first data packet, and performs processing on the first data packet.
  • a data packet is copied to obtain a second data packet, and then the PDCP layer of the first network device transmits the first data packet to the RLC layer of the first network device, and sends the second data packet to the RLC layer of the second network device .
  • the first network device configures the terminal device to associate the SRB with the first transmission path and the second transmission path, regardless of whether the terminal device is configured to perform uplink duplication, the first network device can freely decide to send downlink data packets. Any one of the first transmission path and the second transmission path sends a data packet, or the same data packet is sent through the first transmission path and the second transmission path respectively, that is, the downlink data packet is copied. Therefore, after the first network device configures the terminal device to associate the SRB with the first transmission path and the second transmission path, the terminal device needs to receive data packets on both the first transmission path and the second transmission path.
  • Step 303 After the RLC layer of the first network device receives the first data packet, it is sequentially transmitted to the media access control (MAC) layer of the first network device and then to the physical (physical, PHY) layer.
  • the MCG associated with the first transmission path is sent to the terminal device; after the RLC layer of the second network device receives the second data packet, it is sequentially transmitted to the MAC layer of the second network device and then to the PHY layer, and then associated through the second transmission path
  • the SCG is sent to the terminal device.
  • the PHY layers of MN and SN are not shown in Figure 2.
  • the terminal device may first receive the first data packet from the first transmission path, or it may first receive the second data packet from the second transmission path, and may also receive the first data packet at the same time. Data packet and second data packet.
  • the terminal device For the Acknowledge Mode (AM) scenario, if the terminal device first receives the first data packet at the RLC layer, the RLC layer of the terminal device sends an ACK response to the MN to indicate that the first data packet is successfully received. After the RLC layer of the first network device receives the ACK response, it can be transmitted to the PDCP layer of the first network device. The PDCP layer of the first network device can notify the second network device that the RLC layer of the second network device has received the first data packet successfully. Prevent the RLC layer of the first network device from continuing to send the second data packet. If the terminal device first receives the second data packet, it may send an ACK response to the second network device through the RLC layer of the terminal device to indicate that the second data packet is successfully received.
  • AM Acknowledge Mode
  • the RLC layer of the second network device After the RLC layer of the second network device receives the ACK response, it can report it to the PDCP layer of the first network device, and the PDCP layer of the first network device transmits the information that the second data packet is successfully received to the first network device.
  • the second data packet of the RLC layer is successfully received to prevent the RLC layer of the first network device from continuing to send the first data packet.
  • the integrity protection check of the first data packet and/or the second data packet is required to improve communication The safety and reliability.
  • the terminal device will trigger the re-establishment of the RRC connection, which will easily cause the terminal device to interrupt the communication for a long time.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, so that the terminal device can fail the integrity protection check of the data packet received on one transmission path when the terminal device is configured with two or more transmission paths.
  • the instruction information can be sent to the RAN device through another transmission path, so that the RAN device can perform corresponding processing.
  • the integrity protection When the verification fails, the transmission path of the successfully verified data packet can be integrity protected to send indication information to the RAN device, so that the RAN device can perform corresponding processing, and the data packet on a certain transmission path of the terminal device is complete Compared with triggering the re-establishment of the RRC connection when the performance check fails, it helps to reduce the number of times that the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection and improve the communication performance.
  • the terminal device accesses the first network device and the second network device as an example.
  • the first network device is the first RAN device
  • the second network device is the second RAN device
  • the first RAN device and the second RAN device are dual connection.
  • a communication method includes the following steps:
  • Step 401 The terminal device is configured with a first transmission path and a second transmission path, and can receive data packets through the first transmission path and the second transmission path respectively.
  • the terminal device is configured with one or more split bearers, and a first transmission path and a second transmission path are established for each split bearer.
  • the first transmission path is MCG RLC bearer
  • the second transmission path is SCG RLC bearer
  • the first transmission path is MCG RLC bear
  • the second transmission path is SCG RLC bearer.
  • MCG RLC bearer is associated with MCG
  • SCG RLC bearer is associated with SCG.
  • the terminal device receives downlink data packets through the above MCG and SCG, and sends uplink data packets through the MCG and/or SCG.
  • the split bearer may be split SRB1 or split SRB2.
  • the data packet may refer to the RRC message carried on the SRB.
  • Step 402 The terminal device receives the first data packet through the third transmission path, and performs integrity protection on the first data packet to obtain a first verification result.
  • the PDCP layer of the terminal device performs integrity protection verification on the first data packet to obtain the first verification result.
  • the third transmission path is one of the first transmission path and the second transmission path.
  • the first data packet may be an RRC message carried in SRB1 or SRB2.
  • the terminal device learns that the first data packet has not been copied.
  • the terminal device can learn that the first data packet or the bearer to which the first data packet belongs is not configured with a downlink copy operation by receiving the displayed indication information sent by the network device, or the terminal device can learn in an implicit way, for example, that the bearer to which the first data packet belongs is not configured.
  • the instruction information sent to the network device that the first data packet or the bearer to which the first data packet belongs is configured with a downlink copy operation.
  • the communication method shown in FIG. 4 further includes step 403.
  • the PDCP layer of the terminal device transmits the indication information to the upper layer.
  • the indication information is used to indicate that the integrity protection verification fails.
  • the indication information further includes indication information of the third transmission path, which is used to indicate that the data packet received by the upper layer through the third transmission path has an integrity protection check failure.
  • the upper layer is the RRC layer.
  • the indication information of the third transmission path is MCG or SCG.
  • the communication method shown in FIG. 4 further includes step 404.
  • the terminal device sends a failure report to the network device through the fourth transmission path, and the failure report is used to indicate that the terminal device has an integrity protection check. failure.
  • the fourth transmission path is one of the first transmission path and the second transmission path, and is different from the third transmission path.
  • the foregoing failure report further includes indication information of the third transmission path, which is used to indicate that the data packet received by the terminal device on the third path has failed the integrity protection verification.
  • the terminal device when the third transmission path is the transmission path associated with the MCG in the first transmission path and the second transmission path, the terminal device sends the failure report through the SCG RLC bearer of SRB1, and the terminal device is configured with split SRB1. For example, the terminal device sends a failure report to the network device (for example, the first network device or the second network device) through the SCG RLC bearer of SRB1. In some embodiments, when the third transmission path is the transmission path associated with the MCG in the first transmission path and the second transmission path, the terminal device sends the failure report through the SCG RLC bearer of SRB3, and the terminal device is configured with SRB3 at this time.
  • the terminal device sends a failure report to the network device (for example, the first network device or the second network device) through the SCG RLC bearer of SRB3.
  • the terminal device can send a failure report to the network device through the SCGRLC bearer of SRB3, or the terminal device preferably sends a failure report to the network device through the SCG RLC bearer of split SRB1.
  • the network device sends a failure report to indicate that the RLC bearer of the MCC has failed the integrity protection check of the SRB.
  • the RLC bearer that the terminal device receives the first data packet and the RLC bearer that the terminal device sends the failure report may not belong to the same bearer or may belong to the same bearer, which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device receives the first data packet from the MCG RLC bearer of SRB2 or SRB1, it can send the failure report through the SCG RLC bearer of SRB1 or SRB3.
  • the terminal device may send a failure report through SCG RLC bearer; when the third transmission path is SCG RLC bearer, the terminal device may send a failure report through MCG RLC bearer.
  • a communication method is provided, so that when two or more transmission paths are configured for a terminal device, when the integrity protection verification of a data packet received by the terminal device on one transmission path fails, The indication information can be sent to the RAN device through another transmission path, so that the RAN device performs corresponding processing.
  • a communication method specifically includes the following steps.
  • Step 501 The first network device sends a first data packet to the terminal device through the first transmission path, and the second network device sends a second data packet to the terminal device through the second transmission path, where the first data packet and the second data packet the same.
  • the first network device sends indication information downlink to the terminal device for the terminal device to learn that it can receive the first data packet and the second data packet.
  • the indication information also indicates information of a bearer that has performed downlink duplication.
  • the first network device is MN and the second network device is SN; or, for terminal devices, the first network device is SN, and the second network device is MN.
  • the first data packet and the second data packet are the same, and it can be understood that the first data packet is obtained by copying the second data packet, or the second data packet is obtained by copying the first data packet.
  • the first transmission path and the second transmission path are transmission paths associated with MN bearers
  • the first data packet may be obtained by MN copying the second data packet at the PDCP layer
  • the second data packet may be MN
  • the first data packet is copied in the PDCP layer.
  • the first data packet may be obtained by SN copying the second data packet at the PDCP layer, or the second data packet may be SN copied the first data packet at the PDCP layer.
  • Step 502 After receiving the first data packet from the first transmission path, the terminal device performs integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain the first check result; when receiving the second data packet from the second transmission path After the data packet, integrity protection verification is performed on the second data packet to obtain a second verification result.
  • Step 503 When the first verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the first data packet is successful, and the second verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the second data packet fails, the terminal device transmits to the first network through the first transmission path.
  • the device sends first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the integrity protection check of the second data packet fails.
  • the terminal device when the first network device is SN and the second network device is MN, if the first verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the first data packet is successful, the second verification result Indicating that the integrity protection check of the second data packet fails, the terminal device may also not send the first indication information to the first network device, but trigger the reestablishment of the RRC connection.
  • the terminal device when the first network device is SN and the second network device is MN, if the first check result indicates that the first data packet integrity protection check is successful, the second check result indicates the first Second, if the integrity protection check of the data packet fails, whether the terminal device sends the first indication information to the first network device through the first transmission path or triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection can be determined according to a pre-configured policy or rule. For example, if the pre-configured policy in the terminal device is when the data packet integrity protection verification on the transmission path associated with the MCG fails, and the data packet integrity protection verification on the transmission path associated with the SCG succeeds, then the Send indication information to the MN on the transmission path associated with the SCG.
  • the terminal The device sends the first indication information to the first network device through the first transmission path.
  • the pre-configured policy in the terminal device is when the data packet integrity protection verification on the transmission path associated with the MCG fails, and the data packet integrity protection verification on the transmission path associated with the SCG succeeds, trigger
  • the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection. set up.
  • the terminal device may also pass the first transmission The path sends information indicating the second transmission path and/or air interface resource information of the second network device associated with the second transmission path to the first network device.
  • the information of the second transmission path may be MCG or SCG
  • the air interface resource information of the second network device associated with the second transmission path may be one or more cell identifiers, and the one or more cell identifiers may be used to indicate transmission The cell used by the second data packet. This helps to improve the rationality of the way the RAN side determines that the integrity protection check of the second data packet of the terminal device fails.
  • the first indication information includes information used to indicate the second transmission path, and/or a cell identifier corresponding to the second transmission path, etc., thereby helping to save signaling overhead.
  • the first network device when the first network device is the MN and the second network device is the SN, if the first network device receives the first indication information, the first network device can send the terminal device Send switching instructions.
  • the switching instruction is used to trigger the terminal device to update the key used for integrity protection and/or the algorithm used for integrity protection. Therefore, the terminal device can update the used integrity protection key and/or algorithm after receiving the handover instruction, without initiating the re-establishment of the RRC connection, which helps to reduce the number of re-establishment of the RRC connection and increase user experience.
  • the first network device may send the switching instruction to the terminal device through the first transmission path. It helps to simplify implementation and improve communication efficiency.
  • the first network device when the first network device is an SN and the second network device is an MN, if the first network device receives the first indication information, the first network device may send the first The instruction information is sent to the second network device. After receiving the first instruction information, the second network device determines the switching instruction and sends the switching instruction to the second network device. After receiving the switching instruction sent by the first network device, the second network device passes the first The transmission path sends the switching instruction to the terminal device. The switching instruction is used to trigger the terminal device to update the key used for integrity protection and/or the algorithm used for integrity protection.
  • the first network device receives the information indicating the second transmission path sent by the terminal device from the first transmission path, and/or the air interface resource information of the second network device associated with the second transmission path At this time, the above-mentioned related information is also sent to the second network device, thereby helping to improve the rationality of the processing method when the RAN side determines that the integrity protection check of the second data packet of the terminal device fails.
  • the key used for integrity protection and/or the algorithm used for integrity protection used to trigger the terminal device to update can be understood as triggering the terminal device to update the MN and the terminal device.
  • the integrity protection key and/or algorithm used for the air interface communication between the SN and the terminal device is determined according to the integrity protection key and/or algorithm used for the air interface communication between the MN and the terminal device Therefore, when the key used for integrity protection and/or the algorithm for integrity protection used in the air interface communication between the MN and the terminal device is updated, the air interface communication between the SN and the terminal device is used for The keys and/or algorithms for integrity protection will also be updated accordingly.
  • the terminal device when the first verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the first data packet fails, and the second verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the second data packet fails, the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection . This helps to make the terminal device communication back to normal.
  • the first data packet and the second data packet are respectively transmitted through different transmission paths. It is possible that the terminal device has already received the second data packet sent by the second network device through the second transmission path. However, the first network device has not sent the first data packet to the terminal device through the first transmission path. For the AM scenario, if the terminal device successfully receives the second data packet, it will send an ACK response to the second network device, indicating that the terminal device successfully received the second data packet, and then the second network device will notify the first network device of the terminal device The second data packet is successfully received, and the first network device may cancel the transmission of the first data packet after determining that the terminal device successfully receives the second data packet to avoid repeated transmission.
  • the first data packet may be pre-configured in the terminal device.
  • the timing duration where the first timing duration may be predefined through a protocol, may also be configured by a network device, or may be configured in other ways.
  • the network device may be the first network device or the second network device.
  • the first timing duration may be pre-configured in the terminal device with PDCP configuration parameters.
  • the terminal device After receiving the first data packet sent by the first network device on the first transmission path, the terminal device performs an integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain the first check result, and after obtaining the first data packet If the second data packet has not been received at the time of the verification result, the first timer is started. If the terminal device receives the second data packet within the first timing period, the integrity protection verification of the second data packet is performed. Obtain the second verification result.
  • the specific implementation manner for the terminal device to determine whether to trigger the re-establishment of the RRC connection according to the first check result and the second check result can be referred to the above-mentioned related embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device after receiving the first data packet sent by the first network device on the first transmission path, the terminal device performs integrity protection verification on the first data packet to obtain the first verification result, and after obtaining the first data packet If the second data packet has not been received at the time of a check result, the first timer is started. If the first timing period is exceeded, the second network device that the terminal device has not yet received the second data packet sent on the second transmission path Data packet, when the first verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the first data packet is successful, the RRC connection re-establishment is not triggered, and when the first verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the first data packet fails, Trigger the re-establishment of the RRC connection.
  • the terminal device has not received the second data packet after exceeding the first timing period, and when the first check result indicates that the integrity check of the first data packet is successful, the RRC connection re-establishment is not triggered, which is understandable Therefore, the terminal device has not received the second data packet after the first timing period, and when the first check result indicates that the integrity check of the first data packet is successful, refer to the first step in the prior art.
  • the verification result and the second verification result both indicate the subsequent steps performed by the terminal device when the integrity check of the data packet is successful; it can also be understood that the terminal device has not received the second data packet after the first timing period.
  • the second timing duration may be configured on the first network device and the second network device, and the third timing duration may be configured on the terminal device.
  • the second timing duration may be pre-defined through the protocol, or configured in other ways.
  • the third timing duration may be pre-defined through the protocol, may also be configured by the network device, or configured in other ways.
  • the network device may be the first network device or the second network device.
  • the second timing duration and the third timing duration may be pre-configured with PDCP configuration parameters. It should be noted that the second timing duration and the third timing duration may be the same or different, which is not limited.
  • the terminal device After receiving the first data packet, the terminal device sends an ACK response to the first network device, where the ACK response is used to indicate that the first data packet is successfully received.
  • the first network device After receiving the ACK response, the first network device starts the second timer, and after the second timing period is exceeded, it notifies the second network device to cancel sending the second data packet on the second transmission path.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device sends an ACK response to the first network device, it starts the third timer. If the second data packet sent by the second network device on the second transmission path is received within the third timing period, it will Perform integrity protection verification on the second data packet to obtain a second verification result.
  • the RRC connection re-establishment is not triggered; when the first check result indicates the first data packet When a data packet integrity protection check fails, the RRC connection re-establishment is triggered.
  • the first data packet is sent through the first transmission path
  • the second data packet is sent through the second transmission path.
  • the first network device when the first network device is an MN, the first network device carries indication information in the PDCP PDU of the first data packet to indicate that the terminal device is on the first transmission path and the second transmission path To receive the PDCP PDU.
  • the second data packet since the second data packet is the same as the first data packet, the second data packet also carries the indication information.
  • the optional above indication information may be included in the PDCP header.
  • RAN equipment and terminal equipment can communicate through multiple carriers.
  • the carrier where the terminal equipment initiates initial access is the primary carrier
  • the cell on the primary carrier is the primary cell
  • the other The carrier is the secondary carrier
  • the cell on the secondary carrier is the secondary cell. Therefore, in a communication system using CA, one radio bearer can also be associated with two or more transmission paths, and different transmission paths associated with one radio bearer are associated with different cells or carriers. If in a communication system using CA, after the duplication operation is introduced, the same data packet can also be transmitted on two or more transmission paths associated with a radio bearer.
  • the RAN device configures the RB for the terminal device at the RRC layer.
  • the RB is associated with the first transmission path and the second transmission path, wherein the carrier associated with the first transmission path is different from the carrier associated with the second transmission path.
  • the carrier associated with the first transmission path can be understood as a cell associated with the first transmission path; the carrier associated with the second transmission path can be understood as a cell associated with the second transmission path.
  • the first carrier group is associated with the first transmission path
  • the second carrier group is associated with the second transmission path
  • the first carrier group includes at least one first carrier
  • the second carrier group includes at least one second carrier
  • Each first carrier in the carrier is different from each carrier in the at least one second carrier.
  • the first carrier group includes carrier 11, carrier 12, and carrier 13, and the second carrier group includes carrier 21 and carrier 22.
  • carrier 11, carrier 12, and carrier 13 are all different carriers from carrier 21 and carrier 22.
  • the RB configured by the RAN device for the terminal device at the RRC layer may be SRB1, SRB2, DRB, etc.
  • the transmission path associated with the primary carrier may also be referred to as the primary transmission path, and other transmission paths are secondary transmission paths.
  • the first carrier group is associated with the first transmission path
  • the second carrier group is associated with the second transmission path
  • the primary carrier is included in the first carrier group
  • the first transmission path is the primary transmission path
  • the overlapping transmission path is the secondary transmission path.
  • Step 701 The terminal device is configured with a first transmission path and a second transmission path, and can receive data packets through the first transmission path and the second transmission path.
  • the terminal device establishes a first transmission path and a second transmission path for SRBx.
  • the first transmission path is a first RLC bearer
  • the second transmission path is a second RLC bearer
  • each RLC bearer is associated with a cell group.
  • the terminal device establishes a first RLC bearer for SRBx and a second RLC bearer for SRBy.
  • the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer are respectively associated with a cell group, and the terminal device uses the cell group and the second RLC bearer associated with the first RLC bearer.
  • the cell group associated with the RLC bearer receives the downlink data packet.
  • the SRBx/SRBy may be SRB1 or SRB2.
  • the data packet may refer to the RRC message carried on the SRB.
  • Step 702 The terminal device receives the first data packet through the third transmission path, and performs integrity protection verification on the first data packet to obtain a first verification result.
  • the PDCP layer of the terminal device performs integrity protection verification on the first data packet to obtain the first verification result.
  • the third transmission path is one of the first transmission path and the second transmission path.
  • the first data packet may be an RRC message carried in SRB1 or SRB2.
  • the terminal device learns that the first data packet has not been copied.
  • the terminal device can learn that the first data packet or the bearer to which the first data packet belongs is not configured with a downlink copy operation by receiving the displayed indication information sent by the network device, or the terminal device can learn in an implicit way, for example, that the bearer to which the first data packet belongs is not configured.
  • the instruction information sent to the network device that the first data packet or the bearer to which the first data packet belongs is configured with a downlink copy operation.
  • the communication method shown in FIG. 7 includes step 703.
  • the PDCP layer of the terminal device sends indication information to the upper layer, It is used to indicate that the integrity protection check failure of the upper layer has occurred.
  • the indication information also includes indication information of the third transmission path, which is used to indicate that the data packet received by the upper layer through the third transmission path has an integrity protection check failure.
  • the upper layer is the RRC layer.
  • the indication information of the third transmission path is an identifier of the third transmission path, or cell identification information associated with the third transmission path.
  • the communication method shown in FIG. 7 further includes step 704.
  • the terminal device sends a failure report through the fourth transmission path, and the failure report is used to indicate that the terminal device has failed the integrity protection verification.
  • the fourth transmission path is one of the first transmission path and the second transmission path, and is different from the third transmission path.
  • the terminal device sends a failure report to the network device through the fourth transmission path.
  • the RLC bearer that the terminal device receives the first data packet and the RLC bearer that the terminal device sends the failure report may not belong to the same bearer or may belong to the same bearer, which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device receives the first data packet from one RLC bearer of SRB2 or SRB1, it can send a failure report through one RLC bearer of SRB1, as long as the transmission paths (ie, cells or cell groups) associated with the two RLC bearers are different.
  • a communication method is provided, so that when two or more transmission paths are configured for a terminal device, when the integrity protection verification of a data packet received by the terminal device on one transmission path fails, The indication information can be sent to the RAN device through another transmission path, so that the RAN device performs corresponding processing.
  • a communication method includes the following steps:
  • Step 801 The RAN device sends a first data packet to the terminal device through a first transmission path, and sends a second data packet to the terminal device through a second transmission path, where the first data packet and the second data packet are the same.
  • the first data packet is the same as the second data packet. It can be understood that the first data packet can be obtained by copying the second data packet by the RAN device, or the second data packet is the first data packet from the RAN device. Copy it.
  • one of the first transmission path and the second transmission path is associated with the primary carrier.
  • the first transmission path is associated with the first carrier group
  • the second transmission path is associated with the second carrier group
  • the first carrier group includes the anchor carrier
  • the first transmission path is associated with the anchor carrier. Therefore, the first transmission path is the main transmission path
  • the second transmission path is the auxiliary transmission path.
  • Step 802 After receiving the first data packet from the first transmission path, the terminal device performs integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain the first check result; when receiving the second data packet from the second transmission path After the data packet, integrity protection verification is performed on the second data packet to obtain a second verification result.
  • Step 803 When the first verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the first data packet is successful, and the second verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the second data packet fails, the terminal device transmits to the RAN device through the first transmission path
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the integrity protection check of the second data packet fails.
  • the terminal device when the second transmission path is associated with the primary carrier, when the first check result indicates that the first data packet integrity protection check succeeds, the second check result indicates the second data
  • the terminal device may also not send the first indication information to the RAN device, but trigger the re-establishment of the RRC connection.
  • the terminal device when the second transmission path is associated with the primary carrier, if the first check result indicates that the first data packet integrity protection check is successful, the second check result indicates the second data packet integrity protection If the verification fails, whether the terminal device sends the first indication information to the RAN device through the first transmission path or triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection can be determined according to a pre-configured policy or rule.
  • the pre-configured policy in the terminal device is when the data packet integrity protection verification on the transmission path associated with the primary carrier fails, and the data packet integrity protection verification on the transmission path not associated with the primary carrier succeeds .
  • the indication information is sent to the RAN device through the transmission path not associated with the primary carrier, then when the first check result indicates that the integrity protection check of the first data packet is successful, the second check result indicates that the second data packet is complete
  • the terminal device sends the first indication information to the RAN device through the first transmission path.
  • the terminal device triggers the RRC Re-establishment of the connection.
  • the terminal device may also pass the first transmission
  • the path sends information indicating the second transmission path and/or one or more cell identities associated with the second transmission path to the RAN device, and the one or more cell identities may be used to indicate the use of sending the second data packet Of the cell.
  • the first indication information includes information used to indicate the second transmission path, and/or a cell identifier corresponding to the second transmission path, etc., thereby helping to save signaling overhead.
  • the RAN device may send a handover instruction to the terminal device.
  • the switching instruction is used to trigger the terminal device to update the key used for integrity protection and/or the algorithm used for integrity protection. Therefore, the terminal device can update the used integrity protection key and/or algorithm after receiving the handover instruction, without initiating the re-establishment of the RRC connection, which helps to reduce the number of re-establishment of the RRC connection and increase user experience.
  • the RAN device may send a handover instruction to the terminal device through the first transmission path. It helps to simplify implementation and improve communication efficiency.
  • the key used for integrity protection and/or the algorithm used for integrity protection used to trigger the terminal device to update can be understood as triggering the terminal device to update the RAN device and the terminal device.
  • the terminal device when the first verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the first data packet fails, and the second verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the second data packet fails, the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection . This helps to make the terminal device communication back to normal.
  • the first data packet and the second data packet are transmitted through different transmission paths. It is possible that the terminal device has received the second data packet sent by the RAN device through the second transmission path, and the RAN The device has not sent the first data packet to the terminal device through the first transmission path.
  • the terminal device if the terminal device successfully receives the second data packet, it will send an ACK response to the RAN device, indicating that the terminal device has successfully received the second data packet.
  • the RAN device can confirm that the terminal device receives the second data packet. After the data packet is successful, the sending of the first data packet is cancelled.
  • the first data packet may be pre-configured in the terminal device.
  • the timing duration where the first timing duration may be predefined through a protocol, may also be configured by the RAN device, or may be configured in other ways.
  • the first timing duration may be pre-configured in the terminal device with PDCP configuration parameters.
  • the terminal device After receiving the first data packet sent by the RAN device on the first transmission path, the terminal device performs an integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain the first check result, and after obtaining the first check As a result, if the second data packet has not been received, the first timer is started. If the terminal device receives the second data packet within the first timing period, the integrity protection check is performed on the second data packet to obtain the first timer. 2. Check result.
  • the specific implementation manner for the terminal device to determine whether to trigger the re-establishment of the RRC connection according to the first check result and the second check result can be referred to the above-mentioned related embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device after receiving the first data packet sent by the RAN device on the first transmission path, the terminal device performs an integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain the first check result, and after obtaining the first check In the verification result, if the second data packet has not been received, the first timer is started. If the terminal device has not yet received the second data packet sent by the RAN device on the second transmission path after the first timing period is exceeded, then When the first check result indicates that the first data packet integrity protection check succeeds, the re-establishment of the RRC connection is not triggered.
  • the terminal device has not received the second data packet after exceeding the first timing period, and when the first check result indicates that the integrity check of the first data packet is successful, the RRC connection re-establishment is not triggered, which is understandable Therefore, the terminal device has not received the second data packet after the first timing period, and when the first check result indicates that the integrity check of the first data packet is successful, refer to the first step in the prior art.
  • the verification result and the second verification result both indicate the subsequent steps performed by the terminal device when the integrity check of the data packet is successful; it can also be understood that the terminal device has not received the second data packet after the first timing period.
  • the second timing duration may be configured in the RAN device, and the third timing duration may be configured in the terminal device.
  • the second timing duration may be pre-defined through a protocol or configured in other ways.
  • the third timing duration may be pre-defined through a protocol, or configured by the RAN device, or configured through other methods.
  • the second timing duration and the third timing duration may be pre-configured with PDCP configuration parameters. It should be noted that the second timing duration and the third timing duration may be the same or different, which is not limited.
  • the terminal device After receiving the first data packet, the terminal device sends an ACK response to the RAN device, where the ACK response is used to indicate that the first data packet is successfully received.
  • the RAN device After receiving the ACK response, the RAN device starts the second timer, and after the second timing period is exceeded, it notifies the RAN device to cancel sending the second data packet on the second transmission path.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device sends an ACK response to the RAN device, it starts the third timer. If the second data packet sent by the RAN device on the second transmission path is received within the third timing period, the second data packet is processed. The integrity protection check, and the second check result is obtained.
  • the RRC connection re-establishment is not triggered; when the first check result indicates the first data packet When a data packet integrity protection check fails, the RRC connection re-establishment is triggered.
  • the RAN device when the RAN device performs a duplication operation on the downlink data sent by the terminal device, the first data packet is sent through the first transmission path, and the second data packet is sent through the second transmission path.
  • the RAN device carries indication information in the PDCP PDU of the first data packet, which is used to instruct the terminal device to receive the PDCP PDU on the first transmission path and the second transmission path. It can be understood that since the second data packet is the same as the first data packet, the second data packet also carries the indication information.
  • the optional above indication information may be included in the PDCP header.
  • the transmission path used to send the data packet with successful integrity protection check can send indication information to the RAN device (such as MN or SN), so that the RAN device Corresponding processing can be performed.
  • the RAN device such as MN or SN
  • the communication method shown in FIG. 5 can be used in combination with the communication method shown in FIG. 8, which will not be repeated here.
  • the communication methods shown in Figs. 5 and 8 of the present application are introduced only by taking two transmission paths as an example.
  • the communication method can be Refer to the communication method in the case of two transmission paths, which will not be repeated here.
  • terminal equipment and RAN equipment can communicate through multiple carriers.
  • the carrier where the terminal equipment initiates initial access is the primary carrier
  • the cell on the primary carrier is the primary cell
  • other carriers are secondary.
  • Carrier the cell on the secondary carrier is the secondary cell.
  • the terminal device detects the physical layer of the primary cell. Once the physical layer of the terminal device detects the primary cell abnormality, for example, T310 times out, it will report the primary cell physical layer abnormality to the RRC layer. When the primary cell physical layer is abnormal, the RRC The layer triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection. It is easy to cause the terminal equipment to be interrupted for a long time and affect the user experience.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, which enables the terminal device to detect an abnormality in the physical layer of the primary cell, which helps to enable the terminal device to send instructions to the RAN device through other secondary cells that can work normally.
  • the indication information of the physical layer of the cell is abnormal, so that the RAN device can perform corresponding processing, such as instructing the terminal device to switch to another cell, which is helpful compared with triggering the re-establishment of the RRC connection when the terminal device is abnormal in the physical layer of the primary cell
  • the RAN device can perform corresponding processing, such as instructing the terminal device to switch to another cell, which is helpful compared with triggering the re-establishment of the RRC connection when the terminal device is abnormal in the physical layer of the primary cell
  • the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection, and improve the communication performance.
  • a communication method in an embodiment of the present application includes the following steps.
  • Step 901 The terminal device communicates with the RAN device through the primary cell and/or M secondary cells, where the carrier of the primary cell is different from the carrier of each of the M secondary cells, and M is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1. .
  • the carriers of the M secondary cells are carrier 1, carrier 2, and carrier 3 respectively, and the carrier of the primary cell is carrier 0, and carrier 1, carrier 2, and carrier 3 are all related to carrier 0. different.
  • Step 902 When the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, the terminal device sends second indication information to the RAN device through N secondary cells of the M secondary cells, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal.
  • N 1 ⁇ N ⁇ M, and the N is a positive integer.
  • the N secondary cells are normally working secondary cells among the M secondary cells, and can be used for normal communication between the terminal device and the RAN device.
  • the M secondary cells are cell 1, cell 2, cell 3, cell 4, and cell 5 respectively. If cell 1, cell 2, cell 3, cell 4, and cell 5, cell 3.
  • Cells 4 and 5 can be used for normal communication between the terminal device and the RAN device, then the terminal device can send the second indication information to the RAN device through one or more of the cell 3, cell 4, and cell 5.
  • Step 903 After receiving the second instruction information sent by the terminal device through the N secondary cells, the RAN device sends a handover instruction to the terminal device; the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to another cell.
  • the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to another cell, and it can be understood that the handover instruction instructs the terminal device to switch the primary cell to another cell.
  • the other cell indicated by the handover instruction is one of the M secondary cells, it is an intra-cell handover, and if the other cell indicated by the handover instruction is a cell provided by another RAN device, it is a RAN device handover.
  • the RAN device may send a handover instruction to the terminal device through the N secondary cells used by the terminal device to send the second indication information, or may send a handover instruction to the terminal device through other secondary cells that can work normally among the M secondary cells , There is no restriction on this.
  • the terminal device may also send third indication information to the RAN device through K of the M secondary cells.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate the candidate primary cell group, and the final candidate primary cell group includes At least one secondary cell in the M secondary cells, where 1 ⁇ K ⁇ M, and the K is a positive integer. This helps the auxiliary RAN device to determine which cell to instruct the terminal device to switch the primary cell to. It should be understood that at least one of the M secondary cells included in the candidate primary cell group is a secondary cell that can work normally.
  • the second indication information and the third indication information may be carried in one signaling, and may also be carried in different signaling, which is not limited.
  • Step 904 After receiving the handover instruction, the terminal device switches to another cell according to the handover instruction.
  • the terminal device performs primary cell physical layer detection. Once the physical layer of the terminal device detects an abnormality in the primary cell, such as T310 timeout, it reports the primary cell to the RRC layer. Cell physical layer abnormality When the primary cell physical layer is abnormal, then the RRC layer triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection. It is easy to cause the terminal equipment to be interrupted for a long time and affect user experience.
  • this application provides another communication method.
  • the embodiments of the present application will be introduced by taking the MN where the first network device is the terminal device and the SN where the second network device is the terminal device as an example.
  • the terminal device when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, if the terminal device cannot communicate with the MN through the secondary cell of the MN, it can send the second indication information to the MN through the transmission path with the SN, where the second indication The information is used to indicate that the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal.
  • the MN After receiving the second instruction information, the MN sends a handover instruction to the SN, and the SN sends the handover instruction to the terminal device through the transmission path with the terminal device, so that the terminal device can switch the primary cell to another cell.
  • the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal equipment to switch to other cells.
  • the terminal device’s inability to communicate with the MN through the MN’s secondary cell may include the following situations.
  • the MN does not provide the terminal device with a secondary cell, that is, the MN can only communicate with the MN through the primary cell; or, the MN provides the terminal device with M secondary cells, where M is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1, but all M secondary cells are abnormal and cannot be used for communication between the terminal device and the MN.
  • the terminal device when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, if the terminal device cannot communicate with the MN through the secondary cell of the MN, it can also send third indication information to the MN through the transmission path between the SN and the SN to indicate the alternative of the terminal device.
  • the primary cell group, the candidate primary cell group includes at least one secondary cell among the M secondary cells, where 1 ⁇ K ⁇ M, and the K is a positive integer. This helps the auxiliary RAN device to determine which cell to instruct the terminal device to switch the primary cell to. It should be understood that at least one of the M secondary cells included in the candidate primary cell group is a secondary cell that can work normally.
  • the second indication information and the third indication information may be carried in one signaling, and may also be carried in different signaling, which is not limited.
  • the terminal device when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, if the terminal device can communicate with the MN through the M secondary cells of the MN, or communicate with the terminal device through the transmission path between the SN and the terminal device, the terminal The device may send the second indication information to the MN through the N secondary cells among the M secondary cells and/or the transmission path with the SN, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal.
  • M is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1, 1 ⁇ N ⁇ M
  • N is a positive integer.
  • the transmission path used by the MN to send the handover instruction to the terminal device may be the same as or different from the transmission path used by the terminal device to send the second indication information to the MN.
  • the transmission path for the terminal device to send the second indication information to the MN is the transmission path between the SN and the terminal device, and the transmission path used for the MN to send the handover instruction to the terminal device may be K secondary cells in the M secondary cells. 1 ⁇ K ⁇ M, and N is a positive integer.
  • the terminal device when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, if the terminal device can communicate with the MN through the M secondary cells of the MN, or communicate with the terminal device through the transmission path between the SN and the terminal device, the terminal device can communicate with the terminal device through the M
  • the S secondary cells in the two secondary cells and/or the transmission path with the SN sends third indication information to the MN to indicate the candidate primary cell group, and the final candidate primary cell group includes at least one of the M secondary cells Secondary cell, thereby helping the auxiliary RAN device to determine which cell to instruct the terminal device to switch the primary cell to.
  • at least one of the M secondary cells included in the candidate primary cell group is a secondary cell that can work normally.
  • the communication method provided in the embodiments of the present application is introduced from the perspective of terminal devices and network devices as execution subjects.
  • the terminal device or the network device may include a hardware structure and/or software module, and the above various functions are implemented in the form of a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides an apparatus 1000, which includes a transceiver module 1002 and a processing module 1001.
  • the apparatus 1000 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the communication method shown in FIG. 4 or FIG. 4.
  • the device can be a terminal device or a device in a terminal device.
  • the device may be a chip system.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the transceiver module 1002 is used to receive the first data packet from the first transmission path; the processing module 1001 is used to perform integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain the first check result; when the first check When the verification result indicates that the integrity protection check of the first data packet fails, the transceiver module 1002 is configured to send first indication information through the second transmission path, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the integrity protection check fails and the integrity protection check fails. The information of the first transmission path.
  • the apparatus 1000 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the communication method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 8.
  • the device can be a terminal device or a device in a terminal device.
  • the device may be a chip system.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the transceiver module 1002 is used to receive a first data packet sent by a first network device through a first transmission path, and receive a second data packet sent by a second network device through a second transmission path; the processing module 1001 is used as a transceiver module When receiving the first data packet, 1002 performs integrity protection verification on the first data packet to obtain a first verification result; and when the transceiver module 1002 receives the second data packet, performs a verification on the Perform integrity protection verification on the second data packet to obtain a second verification result; then, the transceiver module 1002 is further configured to: when the first verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the first data packet is successful, the When the second check result indicates that the second data packet integrity protection check fails, first indication information is sent to the first network device through the first transmission path, and the first indication information is used to indicate all The integrity protection verification of the second data packet fails. Wherein, the first data packet and the second data packet are the same.
  • the apparatus 1000 is used to implement the function of the first network device in the method shown in FIG. 5 or is used to implement the function of the RAN device in the communication method described in FIG. 8.
  • the device can be a network device or a device in a network device.
  • the device may be a chip system.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the transceiver module 1002 is configured to send a first data packet to the terminal device through a first transmission path, and send a second data packet to the terminal device through a second transmission path; the first data packet and the second data The package is the same; the processing module 1001 is also used to trigger the transceiver module 1002 to send a switching instruction to the terminal device through the first transmission path when the transceiver module 1002 receives the first instruction information sent by the terminal device; wherein, the first instruction information is used to indicate The integrity protection verification of the second data packet fails, and the switching instruction is used to trigger the terminal device to update the key used for integrity protection and/or the algorithm used for integrity protection.
  • the apparatus 1000 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the method shown in FIG. 9 above.
  • the device can be a terminal device or a device in a terminal device.
  • the device may be a chip system.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the transceiver module 1002 is configured to communicate with the first network device through a primary cell and/or M secondary cells, and the carrier of the primary cell is different from the carrier of each secondary cell of the M secondary cells; Is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the processing module 1001 is configured to send first indication information to the first network device through N secondary cells of the M secondary cells when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, where the first indication information is used to indicate the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal; ⁇ N ⁇ M, and the N is a positive integer;
  • the transceiver module 1002 is further configured to receive a handover instruction sent by the first network device after receiving the first indication information through the N secondary cells, and the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to another cell.
  • the apparatus 1000 is used to implement the function of the RAN device in the method shown in FIG. 9 above.
  • the device can be a network device or a device in a network device.
  • the device may be a chip system.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the transceiver module 1002 is used to communicate with the terminal device through the primary cell and/or M secondary cells.
  • the carrier of the primary cell is different from the carrier of each secondary cell of the M secondary cells;
  • M is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1. ;
  • the processing module 1001 is configured to trigger the transceiver module 1002 to send a handover instruction to the terminal device through the N secondary cells when the first indication information sent by the terminal device is received through the N secondary cells of the M secondary cells ;
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal
  • the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to another cell.
  • the processing module 1001 and the transceiver module 1002 please refer to the record in the above method embodiment.
  • the division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • the functional modules in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one process. In the device, it can also exist alone physically, or two or more modules can be integrated into one module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional modules.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides an apparatus 1100.
  • the device 1100 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the communication method described in FIG. 4 or FIG. 4, and the device may be a terminal device or a device in a terminal device.
  • the apparatus 1100 includes at least one processor 1101, configured to implement the function of the terminal device in the communication method shown in FIG. 4 or FIG. 7.
  • the processor 1101 may be configured to perform integrity protection verification on the first data packet to obtain the first verification result.
  • the method which will not be explained here.
  • the apparatus 1100 may further include at least one memory 1102 for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • the memory 1102 and the processor 1101 are coupled.
  • the coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an interval coupling or a communication connection between devices, units or modules, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules.
  • the memory 1102 may also be located outside the apparatus 1100.
  • the processor 1101 may operate in cooperation with the memory 1102.
  • the processor 1101 may execute program instructions stored in the memory 1102. At least one of the at least one memory may be included in the processor.
  • the apparatus 1100 may further include a communication interface 1103 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that the apparatus used in the apparatus 1100 can communicate with other devices.
  • the communication interface 1103 may be a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, or another type of communication interface, and the other device may be a second terminal device or a network device.
  • the processor 1101 uses the communication interface 1103 to send and receive data, and is used to implement the method in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the communication interface 1103 may be used to send the first indication information.
  • the device 1100 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the communication method described in FIG. 5 or FIG. 8.
  • the device may be a terminal device or a device in a terminal device.
  • the apparatus 1100 includes at least one processor 1101, configured to implement the function of the terminal device in the communication method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 8.
  • the processor 1101 may be configured to pass the first transmission path when the first verification result indicates that the first data packet integrity protection verification succeeds, and the second verification result indicates that the second data packet integrity protection verification fails.
  • the first data packet is the same as the second data packet.
  • the apparatus 1100 may further include at least one memory 1102 for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • the memory 1102 and the processor 1101 are coupled.
  • the coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an interval coupling or a communication connection between devices, units or modules, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules.
  • the memory 1102 may also be located outside the apparatus 1100.
  • the processor 1101 may operate in cooperation with the memory 1102.
  • the processor 1101 may execute program instructions stored in the memory 1102. At least one of the at least one memory may be included in the processor.
  • the apparatus 1100 may further include a communication interface 1103 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that the apparatus used in the apparatus 1100 can communicate with other devices.
  • the communication interface 1103 may be a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, or another type of communication interface, and the other device may be a second terminal device or a network device.
  • the processor 1101 uses the communication interface 1103 to send and receive data, and is used to implement the method in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the communication interface 1103 may be used to send the first indication information.
  • the apparatus 1100 is used to implement the above-mentioned apparatus 1000 for implementing the function of the first network device in the method shown in FIG. 5 or for implementing the function of the RAN device in the communication method described in FIG. 8.
  • the device can be a network device or a device in a network device.
  • the apparatus 1100 has at least one processor 1101, configured to implement the function of the network device in the foregoing method.
  • the processor 1101 may be configured to trigger the transceiver module 1102 to send a handover instruction to the terminal device after the transceiver module 1102 receives the first indication information.
  • the transceiver module 1102 may be configured to trigger the transceiver module 1102 to send a handover instruction to the terminal device after the transceiver module 1102 receives the first indication information.
  • the apparatus 1100 may further include at least one memory 1102 for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • the memory 1102 and the processor 1101 are coupled.
  • the coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an interval coupling or a communication connection between devices, units or modules, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules.
  • the memory 1102 may also be located outside the apparatus 1100.
  • the processor 1101 may operate in cooperation with the memory 1102.
  • the processor 1101 may execute program instructions stored in the memory 1102. At least one of the at least one memory may be included in the processor.
  • the apparatus 1100 may further include a communication interface 1103 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that the apparatus used in the apparatus 1100 can communicate with other devices.
  • the communication interface 1103 may be a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, or another type of communication interface, and the other device may be a second terminal device or a network device.
  • the processor 1101 uses the communication interface 1103 to send and receive data, and is used to implement the method in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the communication interface 1103 may be used to receive the first indication information, send a switching instruction, and so on.
  • the device 1100 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the communication method described in FIG. 9 above, and the device may be a terminal device or a device in a terminal device.
  • the apparatus 1100 includes at least one processor 1101, configured to implement the function of the terminal device in the communication method shown in FIG. 9 above.
  • the processor 1101 may be configured to, when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, trigger to send the first indication information to the first network device through N secondary cells among the M secondary cells.
  • the processor 1101 may be configured to, when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, trigger to send the first indication information to the first network device through N secondary cells among the M secondary cells.
  • the apparatus 1100 may further include at least one memory 1102 for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • the memory 1102 and the processor 1101 are coupled.
  • the coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an interval coupling or a communication connection between devices, units or modules, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules.
  • the memory 1102 may also be located outside the apparatus 1100.
  • the processor 1101 may operate in cooperation with the memory 1102.
  • the processor 1101 may execute program instructions stored in the memory 1102. At least one of the at least one memory may be included in the processor.
  • the apparatus 1100 may further include a communication interface 1103 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that the apparatus used in the apparatus 1100 can communicate with other devices.
  • the communication interface 1103 may be a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, or another type of communication interface, and the other device may be a second terminal device or a network device.
  • the processor 1101 uses the communication interface 1103 to send and receive data, and is used to implement the method in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the communication interface 1103 may be used to send the first indication information.
  • the apparatus 1100 is used to implement the foregoing apparatus 1000 for implementing the function of the RAN device in the method shown in FIG. 9.
  • the device can be a network device or a device in a network device.
  • the apparatus 1100 has at least one processor 1101 configured to implement the function of the second terminal device in the foregoing method.
  • the processor 1101 may be configured to trigger sending a handover instruction to the terminal device after receiving the first indication information.
  • the apparatus 1100 is used to implement the foregoing apparatus 1000 for implementing the function of the RAN device in the method shown in FIG. 9.
  • the device can be a network device or a device in a network device.
  • the apparatus 1100 has at least one processor 1101 configured to implement the function of the second terminal device in the foregoing method.
  • the processor 1101 may be configured to trigger sending a handover instruction to the terminal device after receiving the first indication information.
  • the apparatus 1100 may further include at least one memory 1102 for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • the memory 1102 and the processor 1101 are coupled.
  • the coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an interval coupling or a communication connection between devices, units or modules, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules.
  • the memory 1102 may also be located outside the apparatus 1100.
  • the processor 1101 may operate in cooperation with the memory 1102.
  • the processor 1101 may execute program instructions stored in the memory 1102. At least one of the at least one memory may be included in the processor.
  • the apparatus 1100 may further include a communication interface 1103 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that the apparatus used in the apparatus 1100 can communicate with other devices.
  • the communication interface 1103 may be a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, or another type of communication interface, and the other device may be a second terminal device or a network device.
  • the processor 1101 uses the communication interface 1103 to send and receive data, and is used to implement the method in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the communication interface 1103 may be used to receive the first indication information, send a switching instruction, and so on.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the connection medium between the foregoing communication interface 1103, the processor 1101, and the memory 1102.
  • the memory 1102, the processor 1101, and the communication interface 1103 may be connected by a bus, and the bus may be divided into an address bus, a data bus, and a control bus.
  • the processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, a discrete hardware component, and may implement or Perform the methods, steps, and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the memory may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), etc., or a volatile memory (volatile memory), for example Random-access memory (random-access memory, RAM).
  • the memory is any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited thereto.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may also be a circuit or any other device capable of realizing a storage function, for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a dedicated computer, a computer network, network equipment, user equipment, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD for short)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, SSD).

Abstract

Disclosed are a communication method and apparatus, relating to the technical field of communications. The method comprises: a terminal device receiving a first data packet sent by a first network device by means of a first transmission path, and receiving a second data packet sent by a second network device by means of a second transmission path; when the first data packet is received, performing an integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain a first check result; when the second data packet is received, performing the integrity protection check on the second data packet to obtain a second check result; when the first check result indicates that the integrity protection check of the first data packet is successful and the second check result indicates that the integrity protection check of the second data packet has failed, the terminal device sending first indication information to the first network device, wherein the first indication information is used for indicating that the integrity protection check of the second data packet has failed. The first data packet is the same as the second data packet. The technical solution facilitates a reduction in the number of times of reestablishment, triggered by the terminal device, of an RRC connection and an improvement in the communication performance.

Description

一种通信方法及装置Communication method and device
相关申请的交叉引用Cross references to related applications
本申请要求在2019年03月29日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910253302.2、申请名称为“一种通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the Chinese Patent Office, the application number is 201910253302.2, and the application name is "a communication method and device" on March 29, 2019, the entire content of which is incorporated into this application by reference.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,特别涉及一种通信方法及装置。This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and device.
背景技术Background technique
目前,第五代移动通信系统(5th generation,5G)在无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)侧引入了复制(duplication)操作。具体的,网络设备可以针对无线承载(radio bearer,RB)配置duplication操作。在RAN侧引入了duplication操作的情况下,终端设备可以通过至少两个不同的传输路径分别接收发送端发送的数据包,且至少两个不同的传输路径中每个传输路径上发送的数据包是相同的。Currently, the fifth generation (5G) mobile communication system has introduced a duplication operation on the radio access network (RAN) side. Specifically, the network device may configure a duplication operation for a radio bearer (RB). When the duplication operation is introduced on the RAN side, the terminal device can receive the data packets sent by the sender through at least two different transmission paths, and the data packets sent on each of the at least two different transmission paths are identical.
然而,现有技术中,当RAN侧引入了duplication操作的情况下,如果终端设备与网络设备之间通信发生异常,例如终端设备对其中一个传输路径上传输的数据包进行完整性保护校验失败、或者主小区(primary cell,Pcell)异常时,会导致终端设备触发无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)连接的重建立。而RRC连接的重建立包括小区选择、去终端设备上下文等过程,耗时较长,容易导致终端设备与网络设备之间通信中断较长,影响用户体验。However, in the prior art, when the duplication operation is introduced on the RAN side, if the communication between the terminal device and the network device is abnormal, for example, the terminal device fails the integrity protection check of the data packet transmitted on one of the transmission paths Or when the primary cell (primary cell, Pcell) is abnormal, the terminal device will trigger the re-establishment of the radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) connection. However, the re-establishment of the RRC connection includes cell selection and terminal device context removal, which takes a long time and easily causes a long communication interruption between the terminal device and the network device, which affects the user experience.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供了一种通信方法及装置,有助于降低终端设备触发RRC连接的重建立的次数,从而有助于提高通信性能。The present application provides a communication method and device, which help reduce the number of times that terminal equipment triggers the re-establishment of an RRC connection, thereby helping to improve communication performance.
第一方面,本申请实施例的一种通信方法,所述方法包括:In the first aspect, a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application, the method includes:
终端设备接收第一网络设备通过第一传输路径发送的第一数据包,以及接收第二网络设备通过第二传输路径发送的第二数据包;并当所述终端设备接收到所述第一数据包时,对所述第一数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果;以及当所述终端设备接收到所述第二数据包时,对所述第二数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第二校验结果;然后,当所述第一校验结果指示所述第一数据包完整性保护校验成功、所述第二校验结果指示所述第二数据包完整性保护校验失败时,所述终端设备通过所述第一传输路径向所述第一网络设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二数据包完整性保护校验失败。其中,所述第一数据包和所述第二数据包相同。The terminal device receives the first data packet sent by the first network device through the first transmission path, and receives the second data packet sent by the second network device through the second transmission path; and when the terminal device receives the first data Packet, perform an integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain a first check result; and when the terminal device receives the second data packet, perform an integrity check on the second data packet Protection check to obtain a second check result; then, when the first check result indicates that the first data packet integrity protection check succeeds, the second check result indicates that the second data packet is complete When the protection check fails, the terminal device sends first indication information to the first network device through the first transmission path, where the first indication information is used to indicate the integrity protection check of the second data packet. The test failed. Wherein, the first data packet and the second data packet are the same.
本申请实施例中,由于在第一数据包完整性保护校验成功、第二数据包完整性保护校验失败的情况下,终端设备可以通过第一传输路径向第一网络设备发送第一指示信息,使得网络侧进行相应的处理,与终端设备触发RRC连接的重建立相比,有助于降低终端设 备触发RRC连接的重建立的次数,从而提高通信性能。In the embodiment of the present application, since the first data packet integrity protection check succeeds and the second data packet integrity protection check fails, the terminal device may send the first instruction to the first network device through the first transmission path The information enables the network side to perform corresponding processing. Compared with the terminal device triggering the re-establishment of the RRC connection, it helps to reduce the number of times the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection, thereby improving communication performance.
在一种可能的设计中,所述终端设备接收所述第一网络设备在接收到所述第一指示信息后通过所述第一传输路径发送的切换指令;所述切换指令用于触发所述终端设备更新所使用的用于完整性保护的密钥、和/或用于完整性保护的算法。从而有助于提高终端设备通信的安全性,降低对数据包完整性保护校验失败的概率。In a possible design, the terminal device receives a switching instruction sent by the first network device through the first transmission path after receiving the first indication information; the switching instruction is used to trigger the The terminal device updates the key used for integrity protection and/or the algorithm used for integrity protection. This helps to improve the communication security of the terminal equipment and reduce the probability of failure to verify the integrity of the data packet.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一指示信息还包括用于指示所述第二传输路径的信息、和/或与所述第二传输路径对应的小区标识,与所述第二传输路径对应的小区标识用于指示发送所述第二数据包所使用的小区。有助于辅助网络侧对第二数据包完整性校验失败作出相应的处理。In a possible design, the first indication information further includes information used to indicate the second transmission path, and/or a cell identifier corresponding to the second transmission path, which is consistent with the second transmission path. The corresponding cell identifier is used to indicate the cell used for sending the second data packet. It helps to assist the network side to deal with the second data packet integrity check failure accordingly.
在一种可能的设计中,与所述第一传输路径关联的载波和与所述第二传输路径关联的载波不同。从而有助于降低在关联不同载波上的其中一个传输路径上的传输的数据包完整性校验失败时,降低终端设备触发RRC连接的重建立的次数。In a possible design, the carrier associated with the first transmission path is different from the carrier associated with the second transmission path. This helps to reduce the number of times that the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection when the integrity check of the data packet transmitted on one of the transmission paths on the associated different carriers fails.
在一种可能的设计中,与所述第一传输路径关联的载波包括主载波。从而有助于降低对不与主载波关联的第二传输路径上传输的数据包完整性保护校验失败时,降低终端设备触发RRC连接的重建立的次数。In a possible design, the carrier associated with the first transmission path includes a primary carrier. This helps to reduce the number of times that the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection when the integrity protection check of the data packet transmitted on the second transmission path not associated with the primary carrier fails.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一网络设备和所述第二网络设备相同,或者所述第一网络设备和所述第二网络设备为双连接。In a possible design, the first network device and the second network device are the same, or the first network device and the second network device are dual-connected.
在一种可能的设计中,所述终端设备得到所述第一校验结果后,若超过第一定时时长在所述第二传输路径上未接收到所述第二数据包,当所述第一校验结果指示所述第一数据包完整性保护校验成功时,则不触发RRC连接的重建立;或者,In a possible design, after the terminal device obtains the first check result, if the second data packet is not received on the second transmission path after the first timing period is exceeded, when the first When a check result indicates that the integrity protection check of the first data packet is successful, the re-establishment of the RRC connection is not triggered; or,
所述终端设备得到所述第一校验结果后,若超过所述第一定时时长在所述第二传输路径上未接收到所述第二数据包,当所述第一校验结果指示所述第一数据包完整性保护校验失败时,则触发RRC连接的重建立。After the terminal device obtains the first check result, if the second data packet is not received on the second transmission path beyond the first timing duration, when the first check result indicates When the integrity protection check of the first data packet fails, the re-establishment of the RRC connection is triggered.
通过上述技术方案,有助于使得终端设备的在先接收到第一数据包后,能够确定是否继续等待接收第二数据包。Through the above technical solution, it is helpful for the terminal device to determine whether to continue to wait for the second data packet after receiving the first data packet.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一定时时长是预定义的;或者,所述第一定时时长是所述第一网络设备或第二网络设备为所述终端设备配置的。有助于简化实现方式。In a possible design, the first timing duration is predefined; or, the first timing duration is configured by the first network device or the second network device for the terminal device. Help simplify the implementation.
在一种可能的设计中,当对于所述终端设备来说,在第一网络设备为主节点,第二网络设备为辅节点,且第一网络设备和第二网络设备为双连接的情况下,当所述第一校验结果指示所述第一数据包完整性保护校验失败、所述第二校验结果指示所述第二数据包完整性保护校验成功时,所述终端设备触发RRC连接的重建立。有助于提高通信性能。In a possible design, for the terminal device, when the first network device is the master node, the second network device is the auxiliary node, and the first network device and the second network device are dual-connected When the first check result indicates that the first data packet integrity protection check fails, and the second check result indicates that the second data packet integrity protection check succeeds, the terminal device triggers Re-establishment of RRC connection. Help improve communication performance.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一数据包和所述第二数据包均包括第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示数据包进行了复制操作,且通过不同传输路径接收。有助于保证终端设备从不同传输路径上接收到分别接收到第一数据包和第二数据包。In a possible design, both the first data packet and the second data packet include second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the data packet has undergone a copy operation and is received through different transmission paths. . It helps to ensure that the terminal device receives the first data packet and the second data packet separately from different transmission paths.
第二方面,本申请实施例的一种通信方法,所述方法包括:In the second aspect, a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application, the method includes:
第一网络设备通过第一传输路径向终端设备发送第一数据包,以及通过第二传输路径向所述终端设备发送第二数据包;所述第一数据包和所述第二数据包相同;所述第一网络设备当接收到所述终端设备发送的第一指示信息时,通过所述第一传输路径向所述终端设备发送切换指令;其中,所述第一指示信息用于指示第二数据包完整性保护校验失败,所述切换指令用于触发所述终端设备更新所使用的用于完整性保护的密钥、和/或用于完整性 保护的算法。The first network device sends a first data packet to the terminal device through a first transmission path, and sends a second data packet to the terminal device through a second transmission path; the first data packet and the second data packet are the same; When the first network device receives the first instruction information sent by the terminal device, it sends a switching instruction to the terminal device through the first transmission path; wherein the first instruction information is used to instruct the second The data packet integrity protection verification fails, and the switching instruction is used to trigger the terminal device to update the key used for integrity protection and/or the algorithm used for integrity protection.
本申请实施例中,由于第一网络设备在接收到第二数据包完整性校验失败时,能够向终端设备发送切换指令,与终端设备触发RRC连接的重建立相比,有助于降低终端设备触发RRC连接的重建立的次数,从而提高通信性能。In the embodiment of the present application, since the first network device can send a handover instruction to the terminal device when the integrity check of the second data packet fails, compared with the terminal device triggering the re-establishment of the RRC connection, this helps reduce the number of terminal devices. The number of times the device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection, thereby improving communication performance.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一指示信息还包括用于指示所述第二传输路径的信息、和/或与所述第二传输路径对应的小区标识,与所述第二传输路径对应的小区标识用于指示发送所述第二数据包所使用的小区。有助于辅助网络侧对第二数据包完整性校验失败作出相应的处理。In a possible design, the first indication information further includes information used to indicate the second transmission path, and/or a cell identifier corresponding to the second transmission path, which is consistent with the second transmission path. The corresponding cell identifier is used to indicate the cell used for sending the second data packet. It helps to assist the network side to deal with the second data packet integrity check failure accordingly.
在一种可能的设计中,与所述第一传输路径关联的载波和与所述第二传输路径关联的载波不同。从而有助于降低在关联不同载波上的其中一个传输路径上的传输的数据包完整性校验失败时,降低终端设备触发RRC连接的重建立的次数。In a possible design, the carrier associated with the first transmission path is different from the carrier associated with the second transmission path. This helps to reduce the number of times that the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection when the integrity check of the data packet transmitted on one of the transmission paths on the associated different carriers fails.
在一种可能的设计中,与所述第一传输路径关联的载波包括主载波。从而有助于降低对不与主载波关联的第二传输路径上传输的数据包完整性保护校验失败时,降低终端设备触发RRC连接的重建立的次数。In a possible design, the carrier associated with the first transmission path includes a primary carrier. This helps to reduce the number of times that the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection when the integrity protection check of the data packet transmitted on the second transmission path not associated with the primary carrier fails.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二传输路径为第二网络设备与所述终端设备之间的传输路径,所述第一网络设备和所述第二网络设备为双连接。In a possible design, the second transmission path is a transmission path between a second network device and the terminal device, and the first network device and the second network device are dual-connected.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一网络设备为所述终端设备配置第一定时时长,所述第一定时时长为所述终端设备在得到所述第一校验结果后,在所述第二传输路径上等待接收所述第二数据包的最大时长,所述第一校验结果为所述第一数据包的完整性保护校验结果。In a possible design, the first network device configures the terminal device with a first timing duration, and the first timing duration is that after the terminal device obtains the first check result, the The maximum length of time for waiting to receive the second data packet on the second transmission path, and the first check result is an integrity protection check result of the first data packet.
通过上述技术方案,有助于使得终端设备的在先接收到第一数据包后,能够确定是否继续等待接收第二数据包。Through the above technical solution, it is helpful for the terminal device to determine whether to continue to wait for the second data packet after receiving the first data packet.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一网络设备通过所述第一传输路径向所述终端设备发送第一数据包;并在接收到第一确认应答后,在第二定时时长内通过所述第二传输路径向所述终端设备发送所述第二数据包;所述第一确认应答用于指示所述第一数据包接收成功。In a possible design, the first network device sends a first data packet to the terminal device through the first transmission path; and after receiving the first confirmation response, it passes through all the data packets within a second timing period. The second transmission path sends the second data packet to the terminal device; the first confirmation response is used to indicate that the first data packet is successfully received.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一网络设备接收到所述第一确认应答,若超过第二定时时长,则取消通过所述第二传输路径向所述终端设备发送所述第二数据包。In a possible design, the first network device receives the first confirmation response, and if it exceeds a second timing period, cancels sending the second data to the terminal device through the second transmission path package.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一数据包和所述第二数据包均包括第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示数据包进行了复制操作,且通过不同个传输路径接收。有助于保证终端设备从不同传输路径上接收到分别接收到第一数据包和第二数据包。In a possible design, both the first data packet and the second data packet include second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the data packet has undergone a copy operation and passes through different transmission paths. receive. It helps to ensure that the terminal device receives the first data packet and the second data packet separately from different transmission paths.
第三方面,本申请实施例的一种通信方法,所述方法包括:In a third aspect, a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application, the method includes:
终端设备从第一传输路径接收第一数据包;并对所述第一数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果;当所述第一校验结果指示所述第一数据包完整性保护校验失败时,所述终端设备通过第二传输路径发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示完整性保护校验失败和所述第一传输路径的信息。The terminal device receives the first data packet from the first transmission path; performs an integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain a first check result; when the first check result indicates the first data packet When the integrity protection check fails, the terminal device sends first indication information through the second transmission path, where the first indication information is used to indicate the integrity protection check failure and the information of the first transmission path.
本申请实施例中,由于在第一数据包完整成功性保护校验失败的情况下,终端设备可以通过第二传输路径发送第一指示信息,使得网络侧进行相应的处理,与终端设备触发RRC连接的重建立相比,有助于降低终端设备触发RRC连接的重建立的次数,从而提高通信性能。In the embodiment of the present application, since the terminal device can send the first indication information through the second transmission path in the case that the complete success protection check of the first data packet fails, so that the network side performs corresponding processing, and the terminal device triggers RRC Compared with the re-establishment of the connection, it helps to reduce the number of times that the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection, thereby improving the communication performance.
在一种可能的设计中,所述终端设备在分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层对所述第一数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果。有助于便于实现。In a possible design, the terminal device performs an integrity protection check on the first data packet at the PDCP layer of the packet data convergence protocol to obtain the first check result. Help facilitate the implementation.
在一种可能的设计中,当所述第一校验结果指示所述第一数据包完整性保护校验失败时,所述终端设备的PDCP层向无线资源控制RRC层传送第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示所述终端设备在所述第一传输路径发生完整性保护校验失败。有助于终端设备进行进一步处理。In a possible design, when the first check result indicates that the first data packet integrity protection check fails, the PDCP layer of the terminal device transmits second indication information to the radio resource control RRC layer, The second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device has an integrity protection check failure on the first transmission path. Contribute to the terminal equipment for further processing.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一传输路径关联的小区组为主小区组MCG;In a possible design, the cell group associated with the first transmission path is the primary cell group MCG;
所述第二传输路径为与分裂信令无线承载SRB1的辅小区组SCG关联的无线链路控制RLC承载;或者,所述第二传输路径为SRB3的RLC承载。从而简化了实现方式。The second transmission path is a radio link control RLC bearer associated with the secondary cell group SCG of the split signaling radio bearer SRB1; or, the second transmission path is an RLC bearer of SRB3. This simplifies the implementation.
第四方面,本申请实施例的一种通信方法,所述方法包括:In a fourth aspect, a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application, the method includes:
终端设备通过主小区和/或M个辅小区与第一网络设备进行通信,所述主小区的载波与所述M个辅小区中每个辅小区的载波不同;所述M为大于或等于1的正整数;The terminal device communicates with the first network device through the primary cell and/or M secondary cells, the carrier of the primary cell is different from the carrier of each secondary cell of the M secondary cells; the M is greater than or equal to 1. Positive integer;
当所述主小区物理层异常时,所述终端设备通过所述M个辅小区中的N个辅小区向所述第一网络设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示主小区物理层异常;其中,1≤N≤M、且所述N为正整数;When the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, the terminal device sends first indication information to the first network device through the N secondary cells of the M secondary cells, and the first indication information is used to indicate the primary The physical layer of the cell is abnormal; where 1≤N≤M, and the N is a positive integer;
所述终端设备通过所述N个辅小区接收所述第一网络设备在接收到所述第一指示信息后发送的切换指令,所述切换指令用于指示所述终端设备切换到其它小区。The terminal device receives, through the N secondary cells, a handover instruction sent by the first network device after receiving the first indication information, where the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to another cell.
本申请实施例中,由于在主小区物理层异常时,能够通过辅小区向第一网络设备发送主小区物理层异常的指示信息,从而使得第一网络设备能够在终端设备发生主小区物理层异常时,向终端设备指示切换到其它小区,有助于减少RRC连接的重建立的次数,提高通信性能。In the embodiments of the present application, when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, the secondary cell can send the indication information of the physical layer abnormality of the primary cell to the first network device, so that the first network device can cause the physical layer of the primary cell abnormality in the terminal device. When instructing the terminal device to switch to another cell, it helps to reduce the number of re-establishment of the RRC connection and improve the communication performance.
在一种可能的设计中,所述终端设备通过所述M个辅小区中的K个辅小区向所述第一网络设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端设备的备选主小区组,所述备选主小区组包括所述M辅小区中的至少一个辅小区,其中,1≤K≤M、且所述K为正整数。从而有助于辅助网络设备确定切换指令。In a possible design, the terminal device sends second indication information to the first network device through K secondary cells out of the M secondary cells, and the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal A candidate primary cell group of the device, where the candidate primary cell group includes at least one secondary cell in the M secondary cells, where 1≤K≤M, and the K is a positive integer. This helps to assist the network device in determining the handover instruction.
在一种可能的设计中,所述终端设备还与第二网络设备通信,所述第一网络设备与所述第二网络设备为双连接;当所述主小区物理层异常时,所述终端设备若无法通过辅小区与所述第一网络设备进行通信,则通过与所述第二网络设备之间的传输路径向所述第一网络设备发送所述第一指示信息。从而有助于终端设备向第一网络设备发送第一指示信息。In a possible design, the terminal device also communicates with a second network device, and the first network device and the second network device are dual-connected; when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, the terminal If the device cannot communicate with the first network device through the secondary cell, the device sends the first indication information to the first network device through a transmission path with the second network device. This helps the terminal device to send the first indication information to the first network device.
第五方面,本申请实施例的一种通信方法,所述方法包括:In a fifth aspect, a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application, the method includes:
第一网络设备通过主小区和/或M个辅小区与终端设备进行通信,所述主小区的载波与所述M个辅小区中每个辅小区的载波不同;所述M为大于或等于1的正整数;The first network device communicates with the terminal device through a primary cell and/or M secondary cells, and the carrier of the primary cell is different from the carrier of each secondary cell of the M secondary cells; the M is greater than or equal to 1. Positive integer;
所述第一网络设备当通过所述M个辅小区中的N个辅小区接收到所述终端设备发送的第一指示信息时,通过所述N个辅小区向所述终端设备发送切换指令;When the first network device receives the first indication information sent by the terminal device through the N secondary cells of the M secondary cells, sending a handover instruction to the terminal device through the N secondary cells;
其中,1≤N≤M、且所述N为正整数,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述主小区物理层异常,所述切换指令用于指示所述终端设备切换到其它小区。Wherein, 1≤N≤M, and the N is a positive integer, the first indication information is used to indicate that the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, and the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to another cell.
本申请实施例中,由于在主小区物理层异常时,能够通过辅小区向第一网络设备发送主小区物理层异常的指示信息,从而使得第一网络设备能够在终端设备发生主小区物理层异常时,向终端设备指示切换到其它小区,有助于减少RRC连接的重建立的次数,提高通信性能。In the embodiments of the present application, when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, the secondary cell can send the indication information of the physical layer abnormality of the primary cell to the first network device, so that the first network device can cause the physical layer of the primary cell abnormality in the terminal device. When instructing the terminal device to switch to another cell, it helps to reduce the number of re-establishment of the RRC connection and improve the communication performance.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一网络设备通过所述M个辅小区中的K个辅小区向所述终端设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端设备的备选主小区组, 所述备选主小区组包括所述M辅小区中的至少一个辅小区,其中,1≤K≤M、且所述K为正整数。从而有助于辅助网络设备确定切换指令。In a possible design, the first network device sends second indication information to the terminal device through K of the M secondary cells, and the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal A candidate primary cell group of the device, where the candidate primary cell group includes at least one secondary cell in the M secondary cells, where 1≤K≤M, and the K is a positive integer. This helps to assist the network device in determining the handover instruction.
在一种可能的设计中,当所述终端设备还与第二网络设备通信,且所述终端设备若无法通过辅小区与所述第一网络设备进行通信时,所述第一网络设备与所述第二网络设备为双连接,所述第一网络设备还可以通过与所述第二网络设备之间的传输路径接收所述终端设备发送的所述第一指示信息。从而有助于终端设备向第一网络设备发送第一指示信息。In a possible design, when the terminal device also communicates with the second network device, and if the terminal device cannot communicate with the first network device through the secondary cell, the first network device communicates with the first network device. The second network device is dual-connected, and the first network device may also receive the first indication information sent by the terminal device through a transmission path with the second network device. This helps the terminal device to send the first indication information to the first network device.
第六方面,本申请提供一种装置,该装置可以是终端设备,也可以是终端设备中的装置,或者是能够和终端设备匹配使用的装置,该装置可以包括处理模块和收发模块,且处理模块和收发模块可以执行上述第一方面以及第一方面任一种设计的方法中的相应功能,具体的:In a sixth aspect, the present application provides a device, which may be a terminal device, a device in a terminal device, or a device that can be used with the terminal device. The device may include a processing module and a transceiver module, and The module and the transceiver module can perform the corresponding functions in the first aspect and any of the methods designed in the first aspect, specifically:
所述收发模块用于接收第一网络设备通过第一传输路径发送的第一数据包,以及接收第二网络设备通过第二传输路径发送的第二数据包;所述处理模块用于当所述收发模块接收到所述第一数据包时,对所述第一数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果;以及当所述收发模块接收到所述第二数据包时,对所述第二数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第二校验结果;然后,所述收发模块还用于当所述第一校验结果指示所述第一数据包完整性保护校验成功、所述第二校验结果指示所述第二数据包完整性保护校验失败时,通过所述第一传输路径向所述第一网络设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二数据包完整性保护校验失败。其中,所述第一数据包和所述第二数据包相同。The transceiver module is configured to receive a first data packet sent by a first network device through a first transmission path, and receive a second data packet sent by a second network device through a second transmission path; the processing module is used to When the transceiver module receives the first data packet, it performs an integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain a first check result; and when the transceiver module receives the second data packet, Perform integrity protection verification on the second data packet to obtain a second verification result; then, the transceiver module is further configured to: when the first verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the first data packet is successful When the second check result indicates that the integrity protection check of the second data packet fails, the first indication information is sent to the first network device through the first transmission path, and the first indication information is used To indicate that the integrity protection verification of the second data packet fails. Wherein, the first data packet and the second data packet are the same.
在一种可能的设计中,所述收发模块还用于接收所述第一网络设备在接收到所述第一指示信息后通过所述第一传输路径发送的切换指令;所述切换指令用于触发所述终端设备更新所使用的用于完整性保护的密钥、和/或用于完整性保护的算法。In a possible design, the transceiver module is further configured to receive a switching instruction sent by the first network device through the first transmission path after receiving the first indication information; the switching instruction is used to Trigger the terminal device to update the key used for integrity protection and/or the algorithm used for integrity protection.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一指示信息还包括用于指示所述第二传输路径的信息、和/或与所述第二传输路径对应的小区标识,与所述第二传输路径对应的小区标识用于指示发送所述第二数据包所使用的小区。In a possible design, the first indication information further includes information used to indicate the second transmission path, and/or a cell identifier corresponding to the second transmission path, which is consistent with the second transmission path. The corresponding cell identifier is used to indicate the cell used for sending the second data packet.
在一种可能的设计中,与所述第一传输路径关联的载波和与所述第二传输路径关联的载波不同。In a possible design, the carrier associated with the first transmission path is different from the carrier associated with the second transmission path.
在一种可能的设计中,与所述第一传输路径关联的载波包括主载波。In a possible design, the carrier associated with the first transmission path includes a primary carrier.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一网络设备和所述第二网络设备相同,或者所述第一网络设备和所述第二网络设备为双连接。In a possible design, the first network device and the second network device are the same, or the first network device and the second network device are dual-connected.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理模块还用于得到所述第一校验结果后,若超过第一定时时长所述收发模块在所述第二传输路径上未接收到所述第二数据包,当所述第一校验结果指示所述第一数据包完整性保护校验成功时,则不触发RRC连接的重建立;或者,In a possible design, the processing module is further configured to obtain the first check result, and if the first timing duration is exceeded, the transceiver module does not receive the second transmission path on the second transmission path. For data packets, when the first check result indicates that the integrity protection check of the first data packet is successful, the re-establishment of the RRC connection is not triggered; or,
所述处理模块还用于得到所述第一校验结果后,若超过所述第一定时时长所述收发模块在所述第二传输路径上未接收到所述第二数据包,当所述第一校验结果指示所述第一数据包完整性保护校验失败时,则触发RRC连接的重建立。The processing module is further configured to obtain the first check result, if the transceiver module does not receive the second data packet on the second transmission path if the first timing duration is exceeded, when the When the first check result indicates that the integrity protection check of the first data packet fails, the re-establishment of the RRC connection is triggered.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一定时时长是预定义的;或者,所述第一定时时长是所述第一网络设备或第二网络设备为所述终端设备配置的。In a possible design, the first timing duration is predefined; or, the first timing duration is configured by the first network device or the second network device for the terminal device.
在一种可能的设计中,当对于所述终端设备来说,在第一网络设备为主节点,第二网络设备为辅节点,且第一网络设备和第二网络设备为双连接的情况下,当所述第一校验结果指示所述第一数据包完整性保护校验失败、所述第二校验结果指示所述第二数据包完整 性保护校验成功时,所述终端设备触发无线资源控制RRC连接的重建立。In a possible design, for the terminal device, when the first network device is the master node, the second network device is the auxiliary node, and the first network device and the second network device are dual-connected When the first check result indicates that the first data packet integrity protection check fails, and the second check result indicates that the second data packet integrity protection check succeeds, the terminal device triggers The radio resource controls the re-establishment of the RRC connection.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一数据包和所述第二数据包均包括第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示数据包进行了复制操作,且通过不同传输路径接收。In a possible design, both the first data packet and the second data packet include second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the data packet has undergone a copy operation and is received through different transmission paths. .
第七方面,本申请提供一种装置,该装置可以是网络设备,也可以是网络设备中的装置,或者是能够和网络设备匹配使用的装置,该装置可以包括处理模块和收发模块,且处理模块和收发模块可以执行上述第二方面及第二方面任一种设计的方法中的相应功能,具体的:In the seventh aspect, the present application provides a device, which may be a network device, a device in a network device, or a device that can be used in conjunction with a network device. The device may include a processing module and a transceiver module, and The module and the transceiver module can perform the corresponding functions in the second aspect and any of the methods designed in the second aspect, specifically:
所述收发模块用于通过第一传输路径向终端设备发送第一数据包,以及通过第二传输路径向所述终端设备发送第二数据包;所述第一数据包和所述第二数据包相同;所述处理模块还用于当所述收发模块接收到所述终端设备发送的第一指示信息时,触发所述收发模块通过所述第一传输路径向所述终端设备发送切换指令;其中,所述第一指示信息用于指示第二数据包完整性保护校验失败,所述切换指令用于触发所述终端设备更新所使用的用于完整性保护的密钥、和/或用于完整性保护的算法。The transceiver module is configured to send a first data packet to the terminal device via a first transmission path, and send a second data packet to the terminal device via a second transmission path; the first data packet and the second data packet The same; the processing module is also used to trigger the transceiver module to send a switching instruction to the terminal device through the first transmission path when the transceiver module receives the first indication information sent by the terminal device; wherein The first indication information is used to indicate that the integrity protection verification of the second data packet fails, and the switching instruction is used to trigger the terminal device to update the key used for integrity protection and/or to Integrity protection algorithm.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一指示信息还包括用于指示所述第二传输路径的信息、和/或与所述第二传输路径对应的小区标识,与所述第二传输路径对应的小区标识用于指示发送所述第二数据包所使用的小区。In a possible design, the first indication information further includes information used to indicate the second transmission path, and/or a cell identifier corresponding to the second transmission path, which is consistent with the second transmission path. The corresponding cell identifier is used to indicate the cell used for sending the second data packet.
在一种可能的设计中,与所述第一传输路径关联的载波和与所述第二传输路径关联的载波不同。In a possible design, the carrier associated with the first transmission path is different from the carrier associated with the second transmission path.
在一种可能的设计中,与所述第一传输路径关联的载波包括主载波。In a possible design, the carrier associated with the first transmission path includes a primary carrier.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一网络设备和所述第二网络设备相同,或者所述第一网络设备和所述第二网络设备为双连接。In a possible design, the first network device and the second network device are the same, or the first network device and the second network device are dual-connected.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理模块为所述终端设备配置第一定时时长,所述第一定时时长为所述终端设备在得到所述第一校验结果后,在所述第二传输路径上等待接收所述第二数据包的最大时长,所述第一校验结果为所述第一数据包的完整性保护校验结果。In a possible design, the processing module configures a first timing duration for the terminal device, and the first timing duration is that after the terminal device obtains the first verification result, the second timing duration The maximum duration of waiting on the transmission path to receive the second data packet, and the first check result is an integrity protection check result of the first data packet.
在一种可能的设计中,所述收发模块还用于通过所述第一传输路径向所述终端设备发送第一数据包;并在接收到第一确认应答后,在第二定时时长内通过所述第二传输路径向所述终端设备发送所述第二数据包;所述第一确认应答用于指示所述第一数据包接收成功。In a possible design, the transceiver module is further configured to send a first data packet to the terminal device through the first transmission path; and after receiving the first confirmation response, pass the data packet within a second timing period The second transmission path sends the second data packet to the terminal device; the first confirmation response is used to indicate that the first data packet is successfully received.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理模块还用于在所述收发模块接收到所述第一确认应答,若超过第二定时时长,则取消通过所述第二传输路径向所述终端设备发送所述第二数据包。In a possible design, the processing module is further configured to receive the first confirmation response by the transceiver module, and if it exceeds a second timing period, cancel the transmission to the terminal device through the second transmission path Sending the second data packet.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一数据包和所述第二数据包均包括第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示数据包进行了复制操作,且通过不同传输路径接收。In a possible design, both the first data packet and the second data packet include second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the data packet has undergone a copy operation and is received through different transmission paths. .
第八方面,本申请提供一种装置,该装置可以是终端设备,也可以是终端设备中的装置,或者是能够和终端设备匹配使用的装置,该装置可以包括处理模块和收发模块,且处理模块和收发模块可以执行上述第三方面以及第三方面任一种设计的方法中的相应功能,具体的:In an eighth aspect, the present application provides a device. The device may be a terminal device, a device in a terminal device, or a device that can be used with the terminal device. The device may include a processing module and a transceiver module, and the processing The module and the transceiver module can perform the corresponding functions in the third aspect and any of the methods designed in the third aspect, specifically:
收发模块,用于从第一传输路径接收第一数据包;处理模块用于对所述第一数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果;当所述第一校验结果指示所述第一数据包完整性保护校验失败时,收发模块用于通过第二传输路径发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示完整性保护校验失败和所述第一传输路径的信息。The transceiver module is configured to receive the first data packet from the first transmission path; the processing module is configured to perform integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain the first check result; when the first check result indicates When the integrity protection check of the first data packet fails, the transceiver module is configured to send first indication information through the second transmission path, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the integrity protection check fails and the first transmission Path information.
在一种可能的设计中,处理模块具体用于在分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层对所述第一数 据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果。In a possible design, the processing module is specifically configured to perform integrity protection verification on the first data packet at the PDCP layer of the packet data convergence protocol to obtain the first verification result.
在一种可能的设计中,当所述第一校验结果指示所述第一数据包完整性保护校验失败时,处理模块用于触发PDCP层向无线资源控制RRC层传送第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示所述终端设备在所述第一传输路径发生完整性保护校验失败。In a possible design, when the first check result indicates that the first data packet integrity protection check fails, the processing module is configured to trigger the PDCP layer to transmit the second indication information to the radio resource control RRC layer, The second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device has an integrity protection check failure on the first transmission path.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一传输路径关联的小区组为主小区组MCG;In a possible design, the cell group associated with the first transmission path is the primary cell group MCG;
所述第二传输路径为与分裂信令无线承载SRB1的辅小区组SCG关联的无线链路控制RLC承载;或者,所述第二传输路径为SRB3的RLC承载。从而简化了实现方式。The second transmission path is a radio link control RLC bearer associated with the secondary cell group SCG of the split signaling radio bearer SRB1; or, the second transmission path is an RLC bearer of SRB3. This simplifies the implementation.
第九方面,本申请实施例提供的一种装置,该装置可以是终端设备,也可以是终端设备中的装置,或者是能够和终端设备匹配使用的装置,该装置可以包括处理模块和收发模块,且处理模块和收发模块可以执行上述第四方面以及第四方面任一种设计的方法中的相应功能,具体的:In the ninth aspect, a device provided by an embodiment of the present application may be a terminal device, a device in a terminal device, or a device that can be matched with the terminal device. The device may include a processing module and a transceiver module , And the processing module and the transceiver module can perform the corresponding functions in the fourth aspect and any one of the methods designed in the fourth aspect, specifically:
所述收发模块用于通过主小区和/或M个辅小区与第一网络设备进行通信,所述主小区的载波与所述M个辅小区中每个辅小区的载波不同;所述M为大于或等于1的正整数;The transceiver module is configured to communicate with the first network device through a primary cell and/or M secondary cells, and the carrier of the primary cell is different from the carrier of each of the M secondary cells; the M is A positive integer greater than or equal to 1;
所述处理模块用于当所述主小区物理层异常时,通过所述M个辅小区中的N个辅小区向所述第一网络设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示主小区物理层异常;其中,1≤N≤M、且所述N为正整数;The processing module is configured to send first indication information to the first network device through N of the M secondary cells when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, and the first indication information is used for Indicates that the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal; where 1≤N≤M, and the N is a positive integer;
所述收发模块还用于通过所述N个辅小区接收所述第一网络设备在接收到所述第一指示信息后发送的切换指令,所述切换指令用于指示所述终端设备切换到其它小区。The transceiver module is further configured to receive, through the N secondary cells, a handover instruction sent by the first network device after receiving the first indication information, and the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to another Community.
在一种可能的设计中,所述收发模块还用于通过所述M个辅小区中的K个辅小区向所述第一网络设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端设备的备选主小区组,所述备选主小区组包括所述M辅小区中的至少一个辅小区,其中,1≤K≤M、且所述K为正整数。In a possible design, the transceiver module is further configured to send second indication information to the first network device through K of the M secondary cells, where the second indication information is used to indicate The candidate primary cell group of the terminal device, the candidate primary cell group includes at least one secondary cell in the M secondary cells, where 1≤K≤M, and the K is a positive integer.
在一种可能的设计中,所述装置还与第二网络设备通信,所述装置与所述第二网络设备为双连接;所述收发模块还用于当所述主小区物理层异常时,若无法通过辅小区与所述装置进行通信,则通过与所述第二网络设备之间的传输路径向所述装置发送所述第一指示信息。In a possible design, the device also communicates with a second network device, and the device and the second network device are dual-connected; the transceiver module is also used for when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, If it is not possible to communicate with the apparatus through the secondary cell, sending the first indication information to the apparatus through a transmission path with the second network device.
第十方面,本申请实施例提供的一种该装置,该装置可以是网络设备,也可以是网络设备中的装置,或者是能够和网络设备匹配使用的装置,该装置可以包括处理模块和收发模块,且处理模块和收发模块可以执行上述第五方面以及第五方面任一种设计的方法中的相应功能,具体的:In the tenth aspect, the device provided by the embodiment of the present application may be a network device, a device in a network device, or a device that can be used in conjunction with a network device. The device may include a processing module and a transceiver. Module, and the processing module and the transceiver module can perform the corresponding functions in any of the above-mentioned fifth aspect and the method designed in the fifth aspect, specifically:
所述收发模块用于通过主小区和/或M个辅小区与终端设备进行通信,所述主小区的载波与所述M个辅小区中每个辅小区的载波不同;所述M为大于或等于1的正整数;The transceiver module is used to communicate with terminal equipment through a primary cell and/or M secondary cells, the carrier of the primary cell is different from the carrier of each secondary cell of the M secondary cells; the M is greater than or A positive integer equal to 1;
所述处理模块用于当通过所述M个辅小区中的N个辅小区接收到所述终端设备发送的第一指示信息时,触发所述收发模块通过所述N个辅小区向所述终端设备发送切换指令;The processing module is configured to, when the first indication information sent by the terminal device is received through the N secondary cells of the M secondary cells, trigger the transceiving module to report to the terminal through the N secondary cells The device sends switching instructions;
其中,1≤N≤M、且所述N为正整数,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述主小区物理层异常,所述切换指令用于指示所述终端设备切换到其它小区。Wherein, 1≤N≤M, and the N is a positive integer, the first indication information is used to indicate that the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, and the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to another cell.
在一种可能的设计中,所述收发模块还用于通过所述M个辅小区中的K个辅小区向所述终端设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端设备的备选主小区组,所述备选主小区组包括所述M辅小区中的至少一个辅小区,其中,1≤K≤M、且所述K为正整数。In a possible design, the transceiver module is further configured to send second indication information to the terminal device through K of the M secondary cells, and the second indication information is used to indicate the A candidate primary cell group of the terminal device, where the candidate primary cell group includes at least one secondary cell in the M secondary cells, where 1≤K≤M, and the K is a positive integer.
在一种可能的设计中,当所述终端设备还与第二网络设备通信,且所述终端设备若无 法通过辅小区与所述装置进行通信时,所述装置与所述第二网络设备为双连接,所述收发模块还可以用于通过与所述第二网络设备之间的传输路径接收所述终端设备发送的所述第一指示信息。In a possible design, when the terminal device also communicates with the second network device, and if the terminal device cannot communicate with the device through the secondary cell, the device and the second network device are With dual connections, the transceiver module may also be configured to receive the first indication information sent by the terminal device through a transmission path with the second network device.
第十一方面,本申请实施例提供一种装置,所述装置包括处理器,用于实现上述第一方面至第五方面任一方面所描述的方法。所述装置还可以包括存储器,用于存储指令和数据。所述存储器与所述处理器耦合,所述处理器执行所述存储器中存储的程序指令时,可以实现上述第一方面至第五方面任一方面所描述的方法。所述装置还可以包括通信接口,所述通信接口用于该装置与其它设备进行通信,示例性的,通信接口可以是收发器、电路、总线、模块或其它类型的通信接口,其它设备可以为网络设备或终端设备等。In an eleventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a device that includes a processor, configured to implement the method described in any one of the first to fifth aspects. The device may also include a memory for storing instructions and data. The memory is coupled with the processor, and when the processor executes the program instructions stored in the memory, the method described in any one of the first aspect to the fifth aspect can be implemented. The device may also include a communication interface, which is used for the device to communicate with other devices. Exemplarily, the communication interface may be a transceiver, circuit, bus, module, or other type of communication interface, and other devices may be Network equipment or terminal equipment, etc.
在一种可能的设计中,该装置包括:In one possible design, the device includes:
存储器,用于存储程序指令;Memory, used to store program instructions;
处理器,用于调用存储器中存储的指令,使得所述装置执行本申请实施例方法部分各个方面任意一种可能的设计的方法。The processor is configured to call instructions stored in the memory, so that the device executes any possible design method of each aspect of the method part of the embodiment of the present application.
第十二方面,本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行方法部分各个方面任意一种可能的设计的方法。In the twelfth aspect, the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute any one of the possible design methods of various aspects of the method part.
第十三方面,本申请实施例还提供一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,还可以包括存储器,用于实现方法部分各个任一种可能的设计的方法。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In a thirteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application also provides a chip system. The chip system includes a processor and may also include a memory for implementing any possible design method of the method part. The chip system can be composed of chips, or can include chips and other discrete devices.
第十四方面,本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机程序产品,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行方法部分各个方面任一种可能的设计的方法。In a fourteenth aspect, the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, including instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute any possible design method of each aspect of the method part.
另外,第六方面至第十四方面中任一种可能设计方式所带来的技术效果可参见方法部分中不同设计方式所带来的技术效果,此处不再赘述。In addition, the technical effects brought by any one of the possible design methods of the sixth aspect to the fourteenth aspect can be referred to the technical effects brought about by different design methods in the method section, which will not be repeated here.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1a为本申请实施例的一通信系统的网络架构示意图;FIG. 1a is a schematic diagram of a network architecture of a communication system according to an embodiment of the application;
图1b为本申请实施例的另一通信系统的网络架构示意图;FIG. 1b is a schematic diagram of a network architecture of another communication system according to an embodiment of the application;
图2为本申请实施例的另一通信系统的网络架构示意图;2 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture of another communication system according to an embodiment of the application;
图3为本申请实施例一种通信方法的流程示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to an embodiment of this application;
图4为本申请实施例的另一通信方法的流程示意图;4 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method according to an embodiment of the application;
图5为本申请实施例的另一通信方法的流程示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method according to an embodiment of the application;
图6为本申请实施例的另一通信系统的网络架构示意图;6 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture of another communication system according to an embodiment of the application;
图7为本申请实施例的另一通信方法的流程示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method according to an embodiment of the application;
图8为本申请实施例的另一通信方法的流程示意图;FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method according to an embodiment of this application;
图9为本申请实施例的另一通信方法的流程示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method according to an embodiment of the application;
图10为本申请实施例的一装置的结构示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a device according to an embodiment of the application;
图11为本申请实施例的另一装置的结构示意图。FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of another device according to an embodiment of the application.
具体实施方式detailed description
本申请实施例中“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”, 描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A、B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一(项)个”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a、b或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,a和b,a和c,b和c,或a、b和c,其中a、b、c可以是单个,也可以是多个。In the embodiments of the present application, "at least one" refers to one or more, and "multiple" refers to two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, both A and B exist, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects are in an "or" relationship. "The following at least one (item)" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or a plurality of items (a). For example, at least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c, or a, b and c, where a, b, c It can be single or multiple.
本申请实施例可以应用于采用多无线接入技术(radio access technologies,RATs)双连接(mutiple RATs dual connectivity,MR-DC)和/或采用载波聚合(carrier aggregation,CA)的通信系统中。另外,本申请实施例也可以应用于其它可以能够通过多条传输路径发送相同数据包的通信系统中,对此不作限定。The embodiments of the present application can be applied to a communication system that uses multiple radio access technologies (RATs), dual connectivity (MR-DC) and/or uses carrier aggregation (CA). In addition, the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to other communication systems that can send the same data packet through multiple transmission paths, which is not limited.
如图1a和图1b所示,分别为一种采用MR-DC的通信系统的网络架构图。如图所示,MR-DC的通信系统可以包括核心网、主节点(master node,MN)、辅节点(secondary node,SN)和终端设备。其中,本申请实施例中MN又可以称之为主站、锚点(anchor)、主网络设备等,SN又可以称之为辅站、辅网络设备等,本申请实施例对MN、SN的名称不作限定。应理解,MN是一种无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)设备,为终端设备提供无线通信空口的用户面(user plane)和控制面(control plane)协议栈的终结点(terminations)。SN也是一种RAN设备,为终端设备提供无线通信空口的用户面和控制面的终结点。需要说明的是,MN和SN可以为支持不同无线通信技术的RAN设备,也可以为支持相同无线通信技术的RAN设备。所述无线通信技术可以包括但不限于:全球移动通讯系统(global system for mobile communications,GSM)、通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service,GPRS)、码分多址接入(code division multiple access,CDMA)、宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA)、时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access,TD-SCDMA)、全球陆地无线接入(evolved universal terrsetrial radio access,E-UTRA)、下一代无线通信(next radio,NR)等。As shown in Figure 1a and Figure 1b, they are respectively a network architecture diagram of a communication system using MR-DC. As shown in the figure, the MR-DC communication system may include a core network, a master node (master node, MN), a secondary node (secondary node, SN), and terminal equipment. Among them, the MN in the embodiment of this application can be referred to as the primary station, anchor, primary network equipment, etc., and the SN can also be referred to as the secondary station, secondary network equipment, etc. The name is not limited. It should be understood that the MN is a radio access network (RAN) device, which provides terminal devices with a user plane of a wireless communication air interface and a control plane (control plane) protocol stack terminations. SN is also a kind of RAN equipment, which provides terminal equipment of the user plane and control plane of the wireless communication air interface. It should be noted that the MN and SN may be RAN devices supporting different wireless communication technologies, or may be RAN devices supporting the same wireless communication technology. The wireless communication technology may include, but is not limited to: global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access, CDMA), wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA), time-division code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA), global terrsetrial radio access (evolved universal terrsetrial radio access, E) -UTRA), next-generation wireless communication (next radio, NR), etc.
在采用MR-DC的通信系统中,MN可以与核心网实现在控制面和数据面的通信。而SN可以通过MN实现与核心网在控制面的通信。但是SN可以通过MN实现与核心网在数据面的通信,如图1a所示的网络架构,SN也可以与核心网实现数据面通信时,无需通过MN,如图1b所示网络架构。In a communication system using MR-DC, the MN can communicate with the core network on the control plane and data plane. The SN can communicate with the core network on the control plane through the MN. However, the SN can communicate with the core network on the data plane through the MN, as shown in the network architecture shown in Figure 1a. When the SN can also communicate with the core network on the data plane, there is no need to pass through the MN, as shown in Figure 1b.
应理解,本申请实施例中的RAN设备又可以称之为网络设备、接入网设备等,示例的,RAN设备可以为第五代移动通信系统(5th-generation,5G)中RAN设备,例如,下一代基站(generation nodeB,gNB),又可以为LTE中的RAN设备,例如演进型节点B(evolved node B,eNB),还可以为无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved node B、或home node B,HNB)、基带单元(baseband unit,BBU)、收发点(transmitting and receiving point,TRP)、发射点(transmitting point,TP)、移动交换中心、云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network,CRAN)场景下的无线控制器、中继站、接入点、未来移动通信系统中的RAN设备或者未来演进的公共移动陆地网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的RAN设备等。It should be understood that the RAN equipment in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as network equipment, access network equipment, etc., for example, the RAN equipment may be the RAN equipment in the fifth-generation mobile communication system (5th-generation, 5G), such as , The next-generation base station (generation nodeB, gNB) can also be the RAN equipment in LTE, such as evolved node B (evolved node B, eNB), or radio network controller (RNC), node B (node B, NB), base station controller (BSC), base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved node B, or home node B, HNB), baseband unit ( baseband unit (BBU), transceiver point (transmitting and receiving point, TRP), transmitting point (TP), mobile switching center, cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN) wireless controller in the scenario, Relay station, access point, RAN equipment in the future mobile communication system or RAN equipment in the future evolved public mobile land network (Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN), etc.
应理解,本申请实施例的终端设备是一种具有无线收发功能的设备,可以称为终端(terminal)、用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台(mobile station,MS)、移动终端(mobile  terminal,MT)、接入终端设备、车载终端设备、工业控制终端设备、UE单元、UE站、移动站、远方站、远程终端设备、移动设备、UE终端设备、无线通信设备、UE代理或UE装置等。终端设备可以是固定的或者移动的。需要说明的是,终端设备可以支持至少一种无线通信技术,例如LTE、NR、WCDMA等。例如,终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(pad)、台式机、笔记本电脑、一体机、车载终端、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程手术(remote medical surgery)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、可穿戴设备、未来移动通信网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的PLMN中的终端设备等。It should be understood that the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application is a device with a wireless transceiver function, which may be called a terminal (terminal), user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), and mobile terminal (mobile terminal). terminal, MT), access terminal equipment, vehicle-mounted terminal equipment, industrial control terminal equipment, UE unit, UE station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal equipment, mobile equipment, UE terminal equipment, wireless communication equipment, UE agent or UE Devices, etc. The terminal device can be fixed or mobile. It should be noted that the terminal device can support at least one wireless communication technology, such as LTE, NR, WCDMA, and so on. For example, the terminal device may be a mobile phone (mobile phone), a tablet computer (pad), a desktop computer, a notebook computer, an all-in-one machine, a vehicle-mounted terminal, a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, and an augmented reality (AR) terminal Equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving (self-driving), wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, wireless terminals in smart grid (smart grid), transportation safety Wireless terminals in (transportation safety), wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, cellular phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless Local loop (wireless local loop, WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (personal digital assistants, PDAs), handheld devices with wireless communication functions, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, wearable devices, future mobile communications Terminal equipment in the network or terminal equipment in the future evolution of the PLMN, etc.
本申请实施例中,采用MR-DC的通信系统的网络架构包括但不限于以下三种类型:EN-DC(E-UTRA NR DC)、NE-DC(NR E-UTRA DC)、NG EN-DC(Next Generation E-UTRA NR DC)。其中,EN-DC(E-UTRA NR DC)也可以称为Option3系列(Option3 series),即核心网为演进的分组核心网(evolved packet core,EPC),MN为长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)中的RAN设备(例如eNB),SN为NR中的RAN设备(例如gNB)。NE-DC也称为Option 4系列(Option4series),即核心网为5G核心网(5G core,5GC),MN为NR中的RAN设备(例如gNB),SN为LTE中的RAN设备(例如eNB)。NG EN-DC也称为Option 7系列(Option7series),即核心网为5GC,MN为LTE中的RAN设备(例如gNB),SN为NR中的RAN设备(例如eNB)。应理解,上述EN-DC、NE-DC和NG EN-DC均为LTE中RAN设备与NR中RAN设备的双连接,可以简称为LTE与NR的双连接,此外,5G中还支持NR与NR的双连接,即MN与SN均为NR中的RAN设备,简称为NR-NR DC。In the embodiments of this application, the network architecture of the communication system using MR-DC includes but is not limited to the following three types: EN-DC (E-UTRA NR DC), NE-DC (NR E-UTRA DC), NG EN- DC (Next Generation E-UTRA NR DC). Among them, EN-DC (E-UTRA NR DC) can also be called Option3 series (Option3 series), that is, the core network is an evolved packet core (EPC), and MN is a long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE). ) In the RAN device (for example, eNB), and SN is the RAN device in NR (for example, gNB). NE-DC is also called Option 4 series (Option 4 series), that is, the core network is 5G core network (5G core, 5GC), MN is RAN equipment in NR (such as gNB), and SN is RAN equipment in LTE (such as eNB) . NG EN-DC is also called Option 7 series (Option 7 series), that is, the core network is 5GC, MN is RAN equipment in LTE (for example, gNB), and SN is RAN equipment in NR (for example, eNB). It should be understood that the above-mentioned EN-DC, NE-DC and NG EN-DC are all dual connections of RAN equipment in LTE and RAN equipment in NR, which can be referred to as LTE and NR dual connections. In addition, 5G also supports NR and NR. Dual connectivity, that is, both MN and SN are RAN devices in NR, referred to as NR-NR DC.
应理解,在采用MR-DC或NR-NR DC的通信系统中,终端设备可以同时接入至少一个RAN设备,当终端设备接入一个RAN设备时,该RAN设备为终端设备的MN,当终端设备接入两个或多个RAN设备时,该两个或多个RAN设备中有个一RAN设备为终端设备的MN,另外的一个或多个RAN设备为终端设备的SN。It should be understood that in a communication system using MR-DC or NR-NR DC, a terminal device can access at least one RAN device at the same time. When a terminal device accesses a RAN device, the RAN device is the MN of the terminal device. When a device accesses two or more RAN devices, among the two or more RAN devices, one RAN device is a terminal device MN, and the other one or more RAN devices are a terminal device SN.
此外,在采用DC的通信系统中,RAN设备(例如MN、或者SN)可以为终端设备配置分裂(split)承载。例如分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)终结在MN的分裂承载又可以称之为MN terminated split承载,可简称为MN承载;PDCP终结在SN的分裂承载又可以称之为SN terminated split承载,可简称为SN承载。其中,split承载可以理解为可以关联两个或两个以上的传输路径的无线承载(radio bearer,RB),即一个split承载上的数据,可以通过与该split承载关联的传输路径中的一个或多个传输路径进行传输。需要说明的是,一个split承载可以关联的传输路径的最大个数与终端设备接入的SN的个数相关。示例的,在多连接场景下,终端设备接入一个MN和一个SN,则一个split承载关联的传输路径的个数为2。再例如,在多连接的场景下,如果终端设备接入一个MN和两个SN,则一个split承载关联的传输路径的个数为3。In addition, in a communication system using DC, a RAN device (such as an MN or SN) can configure a split bearer for the terminal device. For example, the split bearer of the packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) terminated in the MN can also be called the MN terminated split bearer, or MN bearer for short; the split bearer of the PDCP terminated in the SN can also be called SN terminated split bearer The bearer can be referred to as SN bearer for short. Among them, the split bearer can be understood as a radio bearer (RB) that can be associated with two or more transmission paths, that is, the data on a split bearer can pass through one or the transmission paths associated with the split bearer. Multiple transmission paths for transmission. It should be noted that the maximum number of transmission paths that can be associated with a split bearer is related to the number of SNs that the terminal device accesses. For example, in a multi-connection scenario, a terminal device accesses one MN and one SN, and the number of transmission paths associated with a split bearer is 2. For another example, in a multi-connection scenario, if a terminal device accesses one MN and two SNs, the number of transmission paths associated with one split bearer is 3.
也就是说,在多连接的场景下,与同一split承载关联的两个或两个以上的传输路径中 每个传输路径关联不同RAN设备的空口资源。例如,如果终端设备接入一个MN和一个SN,当一个split承载关联第一传输路径和第二传输路径时,则第一传输路径可以关联MN的空口资源,第二传输路径可以关联SN的空口资源。示例的,本申请实施例中的空口资源可以包括RAN设备(例如MN或SN)为终端设备提供服务的一个或多个小区。其中,MN为终端设备提供的一个或多个小区可以称之为主小区组(master cell group,MCG),SN为终端设备提供的一个或多个小区可以称之为辅小区组(secondary cell group,SCG)。以第一传输路径关联MN的空口资源为例,第一传输路径关联MN的空口资源可以理解为第一传输路径关联MCG中的一个或多个小区。例如,终端设备分别接入MN和SN,其中MN为终端设备提供服务的MCG为MCG1,SN为终端设备提供服务的SCG为SCG2,如果MN为终端设备配置的一个split承载为RB1,RB1关联传输路径1和传输路径2,则传输路径1可以关联MCG1中的一个或多个小区,传输路径2可以关联MCG2中的一个或多个小区。比如,MCG1包括小区11、小区21和小区31,SCG1包括小区12和小区22,传输路径1可以与小区11和小区31关联,传输路径2可以与小区12关联。That is, in a multi-connection scenario, each of two or more transmission paths associated with the same split bearer is associated with air interface resources of different RAN devices. For example, if a terminal device accesses an MN and an SN, when a split bearer is associated with the first transmission path and the second transmission path, the first transmission path can be associated with the air interface resources of the MN, and the second transmission path can be associated with the air interface of the SN Resources. For example, the air interface resources in the embodiment of the present application may include one or more cells where a RAN device (for example, an MN or SN) provides services for a terminal device. Among them, one or more cells provided by MN for terminal equipment can be called master cell group (MCG), and one or more cells provided by SN for terminal equipment can be called secondary cell group (secondary cell group). , SCG). Taking the air interface resources of the MN associated with the first transmission path as an example, the air interface resources of the MN associated with the first transmission path can be understood as one or more cells in the MCG associated with the first transmission path. For example, the terminal equipment is connected to the MN and the SN respectively. The MCG provided by the MN for the terminal equipment is MCG1, and the SCG provided by the SN for the terminal equipment is SCG2. If the split bearer configured by the MN for the terminal equipment is RB1, RB1 is associated with transmission Path 1 and transmission path 2, then transmission path 1 can be associated with one or more cells in MCG1, and transmission path 2 can be associated with one or more cells in MCG2. For example, MCG1 includes cell 11, cell 21, and cell 31, SCG1 includes cell 12 and cell 22, transmission path 1 can be associated with cell 11 and cell 31, and transmission path 2 can be associated with cell 12.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,对于控制面来说,split承载可以为信令无线承载(signal resource bearer,SRB),例如split承载可以为SRB1、SRB2或者SRB3等;对于用户面来说,split承载可以为无线数据承载(data resource bearer,DRB)。It should be noted that in this embodiment of the application, for the control plane, the split bearer may be a signaling radio bearer (signal resource bearer, SRB), for example, the split bearer may be SRB1, SRB2, or SRB3; for the user plane , The split bearer may be a wireless data bearer (data resource bearer, DRB).
如果采用DC的通信系统中,在配置split承载的基础上,引入复制(duplication)操作,则在一个split承载关联的两个或多个传输路径上可以传输相同的数据包。例如,数据包可以为无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)消息等。从而有助于提高RAN设备与终端设备之间通信的可靠性。If a DC communication system adopts a split bearer configuration and introduces a duplication operation, the same data packet can be transmitted on two or more transmission paths associated with a split bearer. For example, the data packet may be a radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) message. This helps to improve the reliability of communication between RAN equipment and terminal equipment.
下面以控制面为例,结合图2所示的网络架构为双连接架构,本申请又称之为第一网络设备和第二网络设备为双连接。第一网络设备和第二网络设备作为发送端设备,终端设备作为接收端设备为例,对引入复制操作后,发送重复数据包的方法进行说明。其中,对于终端设备来说,第一网络设备为MN,第二网络设备为SN;或者,对于终端设备来说,第一网络设备为SN,第二网络设备为MN。In the following, taking the control plane as an example, the network architecture shown in FIG. 2 is a dual-connection architecture, and this application is also referred to as the first network device and the second network device as dual-connection. The first network device and the second network device are used as the sending end device, and the terminal device is used as the receiving end device as an example. The method of sending repeated data packets after the copy operation is introduced is described. Wherein, for the terminal device, the first network device is MN and the second network device is SN; or, for terminal devices, the first network device is SN, and the second network device is MN.
示例的,如图3所示,为本申请实施例一种通信方法,包括以下步骤。As an example, as shown in FIG. 3, a communication method according to an embodiment of this application includes the following steps.
步骤301,第一网络设备为终端设备配置SRB,其中SRB关联第一传输路径和第二传输路径。第一传输路径可以理解为第一无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)bearer,第二传输路径可以理解为第二RLC bearer,第一RLC bear关联MCG,第二RLC bearer关联SCG。Step 301: The first network device configures an SRB for the terminal device, where the SRB is associated with the first transmission path and the second transmission path. The first transmission path can be understood as a first radio link control (RLC) bearer, and the second transmission path can be understood as a second RLC bearer, the first RLC bearer is associated with MCG, and the second RLC bearer is associated with SCG.
步骤302,第一网络设备的RRC层将SRB上承载的数据传送给第一网络设备的PDCP层,由第一网络设备的PDCP层对接收到的数据进行处理得到第一数据包,并对第一数据包进行复制得到第二数据包,然后,由第一网络设备的PDCP层将第一数据包传送给第一网络设备的RLC层,将第二数据包发送给第二网络设备的RLC层。In step 302, the RRC layer of the first network device transmits the data carried on the SRB to the PDCP layer of the first network device, and the PDCP layer of the first network device processes the received data to obtain the first data packet, and performs processing on the first data packet. A data packet is copied to obtain a second data packet, and then the PDCP layer of the first network device transmits the first data packet to the RLC layer of the first network device, and sends the second data packet to the RLC layer of the second network device .
需要说明的是,当第一网络设备配置终端设备将SRB关联第一传输路径和第二传输路径后,无论是否配置终端设备进行上行duplication,对于下行数据包发送,第一网络设备以自由决定通过第一传输路径和第二传输路径中的任一个传输路径发送数据包,或者通过第一传输路径和第二传输路径分别发送相同的数据包,即对下行数据包进行复制操作。因此,当第一网络设备配置终端设备将SRB关联第一传输路径和第二传输路径后,终端设备需要在第一传输路径和第二传输路径上都进行数据包接收。It should be noted that when the first network device configures the terminal device to associate the SRB with the first transmission path and the second transmission path, regardless of whether the terminal device is configured to perform uplink duplication, the first network device can freely decide to send downlink data packets. Any one of the first transmission path and the second transmission path sends a data packet, or the same data packet is sent through the first transmission path and the second transmission path respectively, that is, the downlink data packet is copied. Therefore, after the first network device configures the terminal device to associate the SRB with the first transmission path and the second transmission path, the terminal device needs to receive data packets on both the first transmission path and the second transmission path.
步骤303,第一网络设备的RLC层接收到第一数据包后,依次传送到第一网络设备的媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层再到物理(physical,PHY)层,通过与第一传输路径的关联的MCG发送给终端设备;第二网络设备的RLC层接收到第二数据包后,依次传送到第二网络设备的MAC层再到PHY层,然后通过第二传输路径关联的SCG发送给终端设备。其中,图2中未画出MN和SN的PHY层。Step 303: After the RLC layer of the first network device receives the first data packet, it is sequentially transmitted to the media access control (MAC) layer of the first network device and then to the physical (physical, PHY) layer. The MCG associated with the first transmission path is sent to the terminal device; after the RLC layer of the second network device receives the second data packet, it is sequentially transmitted to the MAC layer of the second network device and then to the PHY layer, and then associated through the second transmission path The SCG is sent to the terminal device. Among them, the PHY layers of MN and SN are not shown in Figure 2.
然而,对于终端设备来说,终端设备可能先接收到来自第一传输路径上的第一数据包,也可能先接收到来自第二传输路径上的第二数据包,还可能同时接收到第一数据包和第二数据包。However, for the terminal device, the terminal device may first receive the first data packet from the first transmission path, or it may first receive the second data packet from the second transmission path, and may also receive the first data packet at the same time. Data packet and second data packet.
对于确认模式(acknowledge mode,AM)的场景来说,终端设备如果在RLC层先接收到第一数据包,则终端设备的RLC层向MN发送ACK响应,用于指示第一数据包接收成功。而第一网络设备的RLC层接收到ACK响应后,可以传送给第一网络设备的PDCP层,由第一网络设备的PDCP层可以通知第二网络设备的RLC层第一数据包接收成功,以避免第一网络设备的RLC层继续发送第二数据包。终端设备如果先接收到第二数据包,则可以通过终端设备的RLC层向第二网络设备发送ACK响应,用于指示第二数据包接收成功。而第二网络设备的RLC层接收到ACK响应后,可以上报给第一网络设备的PDCP层,由第一网络设备的PDCP层在将该第二数据包接收成功的信息传送给第一网络设备的RLC层第二数据包接收成功,以避免第一网络设备的RLC层继续发送第一数据包。For the Acknowledge Mode (AM) scenario, if the terminal device first receives the first data packet at the RLC layer, the RLC layer of the terminal device sends an ACK response to the MN to indicate that the first data packet is successfully received. After the RLC layer of the first network device receives the ACK response, it can be transmitted to the PDCP layer of the first network device. The PDCP layer of the first network device can notify the second network device that the RLC layer of the second network device has received the first data packet successfully. Prevent the RLC layer of the first network device from continuing to send the second data packet. If the terminal device first receives the second data packet, it may send an ACK response to the second network device through the RLC layer of the terminal device to indicate that the second data packet is successfully received. After the RLC layer of the second network device receives the ACK response, it can report it to the PDCP layer of the first network device, and the PDCP layer of the first network device transmits the information that the second data packet is successfully received to the first network device. The second data packet of the RLC layer is successfully received to prevent the RLC layer of the first network device from continuing to send the first data packet.
然而,对于终端设备来说,当在PDCP层接收到第一数据包和/或第二数据包后,需要对第一数据包和/或第二数据包进行完整性保护校验,以提高通信的安全可靠性。通常情况下,第一数据包和第二数据包中一个数据包如果完整性保护校验失败,则导致终端设备触发RRC连接的重建立,容易导致终端设备通信中断时间较长。However, for the terminal device, after receiving the first data packet and/or the second data packet at the PDCP layer, the integrity protection check of the first data packet and/or the second data packet is required to improve communication The safety and reliability. Generally, if the integrity protection check of one of the first data packet and the second data packet fails, the terminal device will trigger the re-establishment of the RRC connection, which will easily cause the terminal device to interrupt the communication for a long time.
有鉴于此,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,使得终端设备可以在配置了两个或多个传输路径的情况下,终端设备在一个传输路径上接收的数据包完整性保护校验失败时,可以通过另一个传输路径向RAN设备发送指示信息,从而使得RAN设备进行相应的处理。进一步的,对于在split承载上进行了duplication操作后,对于不同传输路径上发送的相同的数据包来说,终端设备如果接收到的来自某一个或多个传输路径上的数据包的完整性保护校验失败时,可以通过完整性保护校验成功的数据包的传输路径,向RAN设备发送指示信息,从而使得RAN设备可以进行相应的处理,与终端设备在某个传输路径上的数据包完整性校验失败时,则触发RRC连接的重建立相比,有助于降低终端设备触发RRC连接的重建立的次数,提高通信性能。In view of this, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, so that the terminal device can fail the integrity protection check of the data packet received on one transmission path when the terminal device is configured with two or more transmission paths. At this time, the instruction information can be sent to the RAN device through another transmission path, so that the RAN device can perform corresponding processing. Further, for the same data packet sent on different transmission paths after duplication operation is performed on the split bearer, if the terminal device receives the data packet from one or more transmission paths, the integrity protection When the verification fails, the transmission path of the successfully verified data packet can be integrity protected to send indication information to the RAN device, so that the RAN device can perform corresponding processing, and the data packet on a certain transmission path of the terminal device is complete Compared with triggering the re-establishment of the RRC connection when the performance check fails, it helps to reduce the number of times that the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection and improve the communication performance.
下面以终端设备接入第一网络设备和第二网络设备为例,其中第一网络设备为第一RAN设备,第二网络设备为第二RAN设备,第一RAN设备和第二RAN设备为双连接。In the following, the terminal device accesses the first network device and the second network device as an example. The first network device is the first RAN device, the second network device is the second RAN device, and the first RAN device and the second RAN device are dual connection.
示例的,如图4所示,为本申请实施例的一种通信方法,包括以下步骤:As an example, as shown in FIG. 4, a communication method according to an embodiment of this application includes the following steps:
步骤401,终端设备配置了第一传输路径和第二传输路径,并可以通过第一传输路径和第二传输路径分别进行数据包接收。示例性的,终端设备配置了一个或多个split承载,为每个split承载建立第一传输路径和第二传输路径。示例的,第一传输路径为MCG RLC bearer,第二传输路径为SCG RLC bearer,或者,第一传输路径为MCG RLC bear,第二传输路径为SCG RLC bear。MCG RLC bearer关联MCG,SCG RLC bear关联SCG。终端设备通过上述MCG和SCG接收下行数据包,并通过MCG和/或SCG发送上行数据包。示 例性的,所述split承载可以为split SRB1或split SRB2,此时数据包可以指承载在该SRB上的RRC消息。Step 401: The terminal device is configured with a first transmission path and a second transmission path, and can receive data packets through the first transmission path and the second transmission path respectively. Exemplarily, the terminal device is configured with one or more split bearers, and a first transmission path and a second transmission path are established for each split bearer. For example, the first transmission path is MCG RLC bearer, and the second transmission path is SCG RLC bearer, or the first transmission path is MCG RLC bear, and the second transmission path is SCG RLC bearer. MCG RLC bearer is associated with MCG, SCG RLC bearer is associated with SCG. The terminal device receives downlink data packets through the above MCG and SCG, and sends uplink data packets through the MCG and/or SCG. Exemplarily, the split bearer may be split SRB1 or split SRB2. In this case, the data packet may refer to the RRC message carried on the SRB.
步骤402,终端设备通过第三传输路径接收到第一数据包,并对第一数据包进行完整性保护,得到第一校验结果。例如,终端设备的PDCP层对该第一数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果。其中,第三传输路径为第一传输路径和第二传输路径中的一个。示例性的,第一数据包可以为承载在SRB1或SRB2的RRC消息。在一些实施例中,终端设备获知第一数据包没有进行复制操作。可以理解的,终端设备可以通过接收网络设备发送的显示的指示信息获知第一数据包或第一数据包所属的承载没有配置下行复制操作,或者终端设备可以通过隐式的方式获知,例如没有收到网络设备发送的为第一数据包或第一数据包所属的承载配置了下行复制操作的指示信息。Step 402: The terminal device receives the first data packet through the third transmission path, and performs integrity protection on the first data packet to obtain a first verification result. For example, the PDCP layer of the terminal device performs integrity protection verification on the first data packet to obtain the first verification result. Wherein, the third transmission path is one of the first transmission path and the second transmission path. Exemplarily, the first data packet may be an RRC message carried in SRB1 or SRB2. In some embodiments, the terminal device learns that the first data packet has not been copied. It is understandable that the terminal device can learn that the first data packet or the bearer to which the first data packet belongs is not configured with a downlink copy operation by receiving the displayed indication information sent by the network device, or the terminal device can learn in an implicit way, for example, that the bearer to which the first data packet belongs is not configured. The instruction information sent to the network device that the first data packet or the bearer to which the first data packet belongs is configured with a downlink copy operation.
在一些实施例中,图4所示的通信方法中还包括步骤403,当第一校验结果用于指示第一数据包完整性保护校验失败时,终端设备的PDCP层向上层传送指示信息,该指示信息用于指示完整性保护校验失败。示例的,所述指示信息还包含第三传输路径的指示信息,用于指示上层通过第三传输路径接收的数据包发生了完整性保护校验失败。示例性的,上层为RRC层。示例性的,第三传输路径的指示信息为MCG或SCG。In some embodiments, the communication method shown in FIG. 4 further includes step 403. When the first check result is used to indicate that the first data packet integrity protection check fails, the PDCP layer of the terminal device transmits the indication information to the upper layer. , The indication information is used to indicate that the integrity protection verification fails. For example, the indication information further includes indication information of the third transmission path, which is used to indicate that the data packet received by the upper layer through the third transmission path has an integrity protection check failure. Exemplarily, the upper layer is the RRC layer. Exemplarily, the indication information of the third transmission path is MCG or SCG.
在另一些实施例中,图4所示的通信方法中还包括步骤404,终端设备通过第四传输路径向网络设备发送失败报告,该失败报告用于指示该终端设备发生了完整性保护校验失败。其中,第四传输路径为第一传输路径和第二传输路径中的一个,并且与第三传输路径不同。示例的,上述失败报告还包括第三传输路径的指示信息,用于指示该终端设备在第三路径接收到的数据包发生了完整性保护校验失败。In other embodiments, the communication method shown in FIG. 4 further includes step 404. The terminal device sends a failure report to the network device through the fourth transmission path, and the failure report is used to indicate that the terminal device has an integrity protection check. failure. Wherein, the fourth transmission path is one of the first transmission path and the second transmission path, and is different from the third transmission path. For example, the foregoing failure report further includes indication information of the third transmission path, which is used to indicate that the data packet received by the terminal device on the third path has failed the integrity protection verification.
在一些实施例中,当第三传输路径为第一传输路径和第二传输路径中与MCG关联传输路径时,终端设备通过SRB1的SCG RLC bearer发送失败报告,此时终端设备配置了split SRB1。示例的,终端设备通过SRB1的SCG RLC bearer向网络设备(例如第一网络设备或第二网络设备)发送失败报告。在一些实施例中,当第三传输路径为第一传输路径和第二传输路径中与MCG关联传输路径时,终端设备通过SRB3的SCG RLC bearer发送失败报告,此时终端设备配置了SRB3。示例的,终端设备通过SRB3的SCG RLC bearer向网络设备(例如第一网络设备或第二网络设备)发送失败报告。进一步在本申请的另一些实施例中,当终端设备同时配置了split SRB1和SRB3时,终端设备可以通过SRB3的SCGRLC bearer向网络设备发送失败报告,或者终端设备优选通过split SRB1的SCG RLC bearer向网络设备发送失败报告,用于指示MCC的RLC bearer发生了SRB的完整性保护校验失败。需要说明的是,终端设备接收到第一数据包的RLC bearer和终端设备发送失败报告的RLC bearer可以不属于同一个承载也可以属于同一个承载,本申请不做限制。例如终端设备从SRB2或SRB1的MCG RLC bearer接收到第一数据包,都可以通过SRB1或SRB3的SCG RLC bearer发送失败报告。In some embodiments, when the third transmission path is the transmission path associated with the MCG in the first transmission path and the second transmission path, the terminal device sends the failure report through the SCG RLC bearer of SRB1, and the terminal device is configured with split SRB1. For example, the terminal device sends a failure report to the network device (for example, the first network device or the second network device) through the SCG RLC bearer of SRB1. In some embodiments, when the third transmission path is the transmission path associated with the MCG in the first transmission path and the second transmission path, the terminal device sends the failure report through the SCG RLC bearer of SRB3, and the terminal device is configured with SRB3 at this time. For example, the terminal device sends a failure report to the network device (for example, the first network device or the second network device) through the SCG RLC bearer of SRB3. Further in some other embodiments of this application, when the terminal device is configured with split SRB1 and SRB3 at the same time, the terminal device can send a failure report to the network device through the SCGRLC bearer of SRB3, or the terminal device preferably sends a failure report to the network device through the SCG RLC bearer of split SRB1. The network device sends a failure report to indicate that the RLC bearer of the MCC has failed the integrity protection check of the SRB. It should be noted that the RLC bearer that the terminal device receives the first data packet and the RLC bearer that the terminal device sends the failure report may not belong to the same bearer or may belong to the same bearer, which is not limited in this application. For example, when the terminal device receives the first data packet from the MCG RLC bearer of SRB2 or SRB1, it can send the failure report through the SCG RLC bearer of SRB1 or SRB3.
可以理解的,当第三传输路径为MCG RLC bearer时,终端设备可以通过SCG RLC bearer发送失败报告;当第三传输路径为SCG RLC bearer时,终端设备可以通过MCG RLC bearer发送失败报告。It is understandable that when the third transmission path is MCG RLC bearer, the terminal device may send a failure report through SCG RLC bearer; when the third transmission path is SCG RLC bearer, the terminal device may send a failure report through MCG RLC bearer.
在本实施例中,提供了一种通信方法,使得终端设备可以在配置了两个或多个传输路径的情况下,终端设备在一个传输路径上接收的数据包完整性保护校验失败时,可以通过另一个传输路径向RAN设备发送指示信息,从而使得RAN设备进行相应的处理。In this embodiment, a communication method is provided, so that when two or more transmission paths are configured for a terminal device, when the integrity protection verification of a data packet received by the terminal device on one transmission path fails, The indication information can be sent to the RAN device through another transmission path, so that the RAN device performs corresponding processing.
示例的,如图5所示,为本申请实施例一种通信方法,具体包括以下步骤。As an example, as shown in FIG. 5, a communication method according to an embodiment of this application specifically includes the following steps.
步骤501,第一网络设备通过第一传输路径向终端设备发送第一数据包,第二网络设备通过第二传输路径向终端设备发送第二数据包,其中,第一数据包和第二数据包相同。在一些实施例中,第一网络设备向终端设备下行发送指示信息,用于终端设备获知能够接收到第一数据包和第二数据包。示例的,所述指示信息还指示进行了下行duplication的承载的信息。Step 501: The first network device sends a first data packet to the terminal device through the first transmission path, and the second network device sends a second data packet to the terminal device through the second transmission path, where the first data packet and the second data packet the same. In some embodiments, the first network device sends indication information downlink to the terminal device for the terminal device to learn that it can receive the first data packet and the second data packet. For example, the indication information also indicates information of a bearer that has performed downlink duplication.
需要说明的是,对于终端设备来说,第一网络设备为MN,第二网络设备为SN;或者,对于终端设备来说,第一网络设备为SN,第二网络设备为MN。It should be noted that, for the terminal device, the first network device is MN and the second network device is SN; or, for terminal devices, the first network device is SN, and the second network device is MN.
本申请实施例中,第一数据包和第二数据包相同,可以理解为第一数据包是对第二数据包复制得到的,或者,第二数据包是对第一数据包复制得到的。示例的,如果第一传输路径和第二传输路径为MN承载关联的传输路径,则第一数据包可以是MN在PDCP层对第二数据包复制得到的,或者,第二数据包可以是MN在PDCP层对第一数据包复制得到的。又示例的,如果第一传输路径和第二传输路径为SN承载关联的传输路径,则第一数据包可以是SN在PDCP层对第二数据包复制得到的,或者,第二数据包可以是SN在PDCP层对第一数据包进行复制得到的。In the embodiment of the present application, the first data packet and the second data packet are the same, and it can be understood that the first data packet is obtained by copying the second data packet, or the second data packet is obtained by copying the first data packet. For example, if the first transmission path and the second transmission path are transmission paths associated with MN bearers, the first data packet may be obtained by MN copying the second data packet at the PDCP layer, or the second data packet may be MN The first data packet is copied in the PDCP layer. For another example, if the first transmission path and the second transmission path are transmission paths associated with the SN bearer, the first data packet may be obtained by SN copying the second data packet at the PDCP layer, or the second data packet may be SN copied the first data packet at the PDCP layer.
步骤502,终端设备当接收到来自第一传输路径的第一数据包后,对第一数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果;当接收到来自第二传输路径的第二数据包后,对第二数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第二校验结果。Step 502: After receiving the first data packet from the first transmission path, the terminal device performs integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain the first check result; when receiving the second data packet from the second transmission path After the data packet, integrity protection verification is performed on the second data packet to obtain a second verification result.
步骤503,当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验成功,第二校验结果指示第二数据包完整性保护校验失败时,终端设备通过第一传输路径向第一网络设备发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示所述第二数据包完整性保护校验失败。Step 503: When the first verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the first data packet is successful, and the second verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the second data packet fails, the terminal device transmits to the first network through the first transmission path. The device sends first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the integrity protection check of the second data packet fails.
需要说明的是,对于终端设备来说,当第一网络设备为SN,第二网络设备为MN时,如果第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验成功,第二校验结果指示第二数据包完整性保护校验失败,终端设备还可以不向第一网络设备发送第一指示信息,而是触发RRC连接的重建立。示例的,对于终端设备来说,当第一网络设备为SN,第二网络设备为MN时,如果第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验成功,第二校验结果指示第二数据包完整性保护校验失败,则终端设备是通过第一传输路径向第一网络设备发送第一指示信息,还是触发RRC连接的重建立,可以根据预先配置的策略或规则确定。例如,如果终端设备中预先配置的策略为当与MCG关联的传输路径上的数据包完整性保护校验失败,而与SCG关联的传输路径上的数据包完整性保护校验成功,则通过与SCG关联的传输路径上向MN发送指示信息,则当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验成功,第二校验结果指示第二数据包完整性保护校验失败时,终端设备通过第一传输路径向第一网络设备发送第一指示信息。再例如,如果终端设备中预先配置的策略为当与MCG关联的传输路径上的数据包完整性保护校验失败,而与SCG关联的传输路径上的数据包完整性保护校验成功,则触发RRC连接的重建立,则当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验成功,第二校验结果指示第二数据包完整性保护校验失败时,终端设备触发RRC连接的重建立。上述仅为举例说明,不构成对本申请实施例的限定。It should be noted that for the terminal device, when the first network device is SN and the second network device is MN, if the first verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the first data packet is successful, the second verification result Indicating that the integrity protection check of the second data packet fails, the terminal device may also not send the first indication information to the first network device, but trigger the reestablishment of the RRC connection. For example, for the terminal device, when the first network device is SN and the second network device is MN, if the first check result indicates that the first data packet integrity protection check is successful, the second check result indicates the first Second, if the integrity protection check of the data packet fails, whether the terminal device sends the first indication information to the first network device through the first transmission path or triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection can be determined according to a pre-configured policy or rule. For example, if the pre-configured policy in the terminal device is when the data packet integrity protection verification on the transmission path associated with the MCG fails, and the data packet integrity protection verification on the transmission path associated with the SCG succeeds, then the Send indication information to the MN on the transmission path associated with the SCG. When the first check result indicates that the integrity protection check of the first data packet is successful, and the second check result indicates that the integrity protection check of the second data packet fails, the terminal The device sends the first indication information to the first network device through the first transmission path. For another example, if the pre-configured policy in the terminal device is when the data packet integrity protection verification on the transmission path associated with the MCG fails, and the data packet integrity protection verification on the transmission path associated with the SCG succeeds, trigger When the RRC connection is re-established, when the first verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the first data packet is successful, and the second verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the second data packet fails, the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection. set up. The foregoing is only an example, and does not constitute a limitation to the embodiments of the present application.
在一些实施例中,当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验成功,第二校验结果指示第二数据包完整性保护校验失败时,终端设备还可以通过第一传输路径向第一网络设备发送用于指示第二传输路径的信息、和/或与第二传输路径关联的第二网络设备的空口 资源信息等。例如,第二传输路径的信息可以为MCG或SCG,与第二传输路径关联的第二网络设备的空口资源信息可以为一个或多个小区标识,该一个或多个小区标识可以用于指示发送第二数据包所使用的小区。从而有助于提高RAN侧判定对终端设备的第二数据包完整性保护校验失败时进行处理的方式的合理性。示例的,第一指示信息包括用于指示第二传输路径的信息、和/或与第二传输路径对应的小区标识等,从而有助于节省信令开销。In some embodiments, when the first check result indicates that the integrity protection check of the first data packet is successful, and the second check result indicates that the integrity protection check of the second data packet fails, the terminal device may also pass the first transmission The path sends information indicating the second transmission path and/or air interface resource information of the second network device associated with the second transmission path to the first network device. For example, the information of the second transmission path may be MCG or SCG, and the air interface resource information of the second network device associated with the second transmission path may be one or more cell identifiers, and the one or more cell identifiers may be used to indicate transmission The cell used by the second data packet. This helps to improve the rationality of the way the RAN side determines that the integrity protection check of the second data packet of the terminal device fails. For example, the first indication information includes information used to indicate the second transmission path, and/or a cell identifier corresponding to the second transmission path, etc., thereby helping to save signaling overhead.
在一些实施例中,对于终端设备来说,当第一网络设备为MN,第二网络设备为SN时,如果第一网络设备接收到的第一指示信息,则第一网络设备可以向终端设备发送切换指令。其中,切换指令用于触发终端设备更新所使用的用于完整性保护的密钥、和/或用于完整性保护的算法。从而使得终端设备能够在接收到切换指令后,更新所使用的完整性保护密钥和/或算法即可,无需再发起RRC连接的重建立,有助于降低RRC连接的重建立的次数,提高用户体验。示例的,第一网设备可以通过第一传输路径向终端设备发送切换指令。有助于简化实现方式,提高通信效率。In some embodiments, for the terminal device, when the first network device is the MN and the second network device is the SN, if the first network device receives the first indication information, the first network device can send the terminal device Send switching instructions. The switching instruction is used to trigger the terminal device to update the key used for integrity protection and/or the algorithm used for integrity protection. Therefore, the terminal device can update the used integrity protection key and/or algorithm after receiving the handover instruction, without initiating the re-establishment of the RRC connection, which helps to reduce the number of re-establishment of the RRC connection and increase user experience. For example, the first network device may send the switching instruction to the terminal device through the first transmission path. It helps to simplify implementation and improve communication efficiency.
在另一些实施例中,对于终端设备来说,当第一网络设备为SN,第二网络设备为MN时,如果第一网络设备接收到第一指示信息,则第一网络设备可以将第一指示信息发送给第二网络设备。由第二网络设备在接收到第一指示信息后,确定切换指令,并将切换指令发送给第二网络设备,由第二网络设备在接收到第一网络设备发送的切换指令后,通过第一传输路径将切换指令发送给终端设备。切换指令用于触发终端设备更新所使用的用于完整性保护的密钥、和/或用于完整性保护的算法。需要说明的是,第一网络设备当从第一传输路径上接收到终端设备发送的用于指示第二传输路径的信息、和/或与第二传输路径关联的第二网络设备的空口资源信息时,还将上述相关信息发送给第二网络设备,从而有助于提高RAN侧判定对终端设备的第二数据包完整性保护校验失败时进行处理的方式的合理性。In other embodiments, for the terminal device, when the first network device is an SN and the second network device is an MN, if the first network device receives the first indication information, the first network device may send the first The instruction information is sent to the second network device. After receiving the first instruction information, the second network device determines the switching instruction and sends the switching instruction to the second network device. After receiving the switching instruction sent by the first network device, the second network device passes the first The transmission path sends the switching instruction to the terminal device. The switching instruction is used to trigger the terminal device to update the key used for integrity protection and/or the algorithm used for integrity protection. It should be noted that when the first network device receives the information indicating the second transmission path sent by the terminal device from the first transmission path, and/or the air interface resource information of the second network device associated with the second transmission path At this time, the above-mentioned related information is also sent to the second network device, thereby helping to improve the rationality of the processing method when the RAN side determines that the integrity protection check of the second data packet of the terminal device fails.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,触发终端设备更新所使用的用于完整性保护的密钥、和/或用于完整性保护的算法,可以理解为触发终端设备更新MN和终端设备之间空口通信所使用的用于完整性保护的密钥、和/或MN和终端设备之间空口通信所使用的用于完整性保护的算法。由于SN和终端设备之间空口通信所使用的用于完整性保护密钥和/或算法,是根据MN和终端设备之间空口通信所使用的用于完整性保护的密钥和/或算法确定的,因此,当MN和终端设备之间空口通信所使用的用于完整性保护的密钥和/或用于完整性保护的算法更新后,SN和终端设备之间空口通信所使用的用于完整性保护的密钥和/或算法也会相应的更新。It should be noted that, in the embodiments of the present application, the key used for integrity protection and/or the algorithm used for integrity protection used to trigger the terminal device to update can be understood as triggering the terminal device to update the MN and the terminal device. The key used for integrity protection for inter-air interface communication, and/or the algorithm for integrity protection used for the air interface communication between the MN and the terminal device. Since the integrity protection key and/or algorithm used for the air interface communication between the SN and the terminal device is determined according to the integrity protection key and/or algorithm used for the air interface communication between the MN and the terminal device Therefore, when the key used for integrity protection and/or the algorithm for integrity protection used in the air interface communication between the MN and the terminal device is updated, the air interface communication between the SN and the terminal device is used for The keys and/or algorithms for integrity protection will also be updated accordingly.
在一些实施例中,当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验失败,第二校验结果指示第二数据包完整性保护校验失败时,终端设备触发RRC连接的重建立。从而有助于使得终端设备通信恢复正常。In some embodiments, when the first verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the first data packet fails, and the second verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the second data packet fails, the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection . This helps to make the terminal device communication back to normal.
然而,对于终端设备来说,第一数据包和第二数据包分别是通过不同的传输路径传输的,有可能终端设备已经接收到了第二网络设备通过第二传输路径发送的第二数据包,而第一网络设备还未通过第一传输路径向终端设备发送第一数据包。对于AM场景来说,如果终端设备接收第二数据包成功,则会向第二网络设备发送ACK响应,指示终端设备接收第二数据包成功,然后第二网设备向第一网络设备通知终端设备接收第二数据包成功,而第一网络设备为避免重复发送,可以在确定终端设备接收第二数据包成功后,取消第一数据包的发送。但是,对于终端设备来说是不感知的,而如果终端设备采用图4所示的通 信方法时,需要参考两个数据包的完整性校验结果,来决定是触发RRC连接的重建立,还是发送第一指示信息。However, for the terminal device, the first data packet and the second data packet are respectively transmitted through different transmission paths. It is possible that the terminal device has already received the second data packet sent by the second network device through the second transmission path. However, the first network device has not sent the first data packet to the terminal device through the first transmission path. For the AM scenario, if the terminal device successfully receives the second data packet, it will send an ACK response to the second network device, indicating that the terminal device successfully received the second data packet, and then the second network device will notify the first network device of the terminal device The second data packet is successfully received, and the first network device may cancel the transmission of the first data packet after determining that the terminal device successfully receives the second data packet to avoid repeated transmission. However, it is not perceptible to the terminal device, and if the terminal device uses the communication method shown in Figure 4, it needs to refer to the integrity check results of the two data packets to determine whether to trigger the re-establishment of the RRC connection or Send the first instruction message.
因此,为了使得终端设备在接收到第一数据包和第二数据包其中一个数据包后,便于判断是否继续等待接收另一数据包,在一些实施例中,可以在终端设备中预先配置第一定时时长,其中第一定时时长可以是通过协议预先定义的,也可以是由网络设备配置的,还可以是通过其它方式配置的。例如网络设备可以为第一网络设备,也可以为第二网络设备。例如,第一定时时长可以以PDCP的配置参数预先配置在终端设备中。Therefore, in order to enable the terminal device to determine whether to continue to receive another data packet after receiving one of the first data packet and the second data packet, in some embodiments, the first data packet may be pre-configured in the terminal device. The timing duration, where the first timing duration may be predefined through a protocol, may also be configured by a network device, or may be configured in other ways. For example, the network device may be the first network device or the second network device. For example, the first timing duration may be pre-configured in the terminal device with PDCP configuration parameters.
示例的,终端设备当接收到第一网络设备在第一传输路径上发送的第一数据包后,对第一数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果,并在得到第一校验结果时如果还没有接收到第二数据包,则启动第一定时器,若在第一定时时长内终端设备接收到第二数据包,则对第二数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第二校验结果。示例的,终端设备根据第一校验结果和第二校验结果判断是否触发RRC连接的重建立的具体实现方式,可以参见上述相关实施例,在此不再赘述。For example, after receiving the first data packet sent by the first network device on the first transmission path, the terminal device performs an integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain the first check result, and after obtaining the first data packet If the second data packet has not been received at the time of the verification result, the first timer is started. If the terminal device receives the second data packet within the first timing period, the integrity protection verification of the second data packet is performed. Obtain the second verification result. For example, the specific implementation manner for the terminal device to determine whether to trigger the re-establishment of the RRC connection according to the first check result and the second check result can be referred to the above-mentioned related embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
又示例的,终端设备当接收到第一网络设备在第一传输路径上发送的第一数据包后,对第一数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果,并在得到第一校验结果时如果还没有接收到第二数据包,则启动第一定时器,若超过第一定时时长后,终端设备仍未接收的第二网络设备在第二传输路径上发送的第二数据包,则当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验成功时,不触发RRC连接的重建立,当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验失败时,触发RRC连接的重建立。As another example, after receiving the first data packet sent by the first network device on the first transmission path, the terminal device performs integrity protection verification on the first data packet to obtain the first verification result, and after obtaining the first data packet If the second data packet has not been received at the time of a check result, the first timer is started. If the first timing period is exceeded, the second network device that the terminal device has not yet received the second data packet sent on the second transmission path Data packet, when the first verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the first data packet is successful, the RRC connection re-establishment is not triggered, and when the first verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the first data packet fails, Trigger the re-establishment of the RRC connection.
需要说明的是,终端设备超过第一定时时长后仍未接收到第二数据包,当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性校验成功时,不触发RRC连接的重建立,可以理解为,终端设备超过第一定时时长后仍未接收到第二数据包,当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性校验成功时后续执行的步骤,可以参见现有技术中当第一校验结果和第二校验结果均指示数据包完整性校验成功时终端设备后续执行的步骤;也可以理解为,终端设备超过第一定时时长后仍未接收到第二数据包,当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性校验成功时,向第一网络设备发送为接收到第二数据包的指示。It should be noted that the terminal device has not received the second data packet after exceeding the first timing period, and when the first check result indicates that the integrity check of the first data packet is successful, the RRC connection re-establishment is not triggered, which is understandable Therefore, the terminal device has not received the second data packet after the first timing period, and when the first check result indicates that the integrity check of the first data packet is successful, refer to the first step in the prior art. The verification result and the second verification result both indicate the subsequent steps performed by the terminal device when the integrity check of the data packet is successful; it can also be understood that the terminal device has not received the second data packet after the first timing period. When a check result indicates that the integrity check of the first data packet is successful, an indication is sent to the first network device that the second data packet is received.
在另外一些实施例中,还可以在第一网络设备、第二网络设备配置第二定时时长,在终端设备配置第三定时时长。其中第二定时时长可以是通过协议预先定义的,也可是由其它方式配置的。第三定时时长可以是通过协议预先定义的,也可以是由网络设备配置的,还可以是由其它方式配置的。例如网络设备可以为第一网络设备,也可以为第二网络设备。例如,第二定时时长、第三定时时长可以以PDCP的配置参数预先配置。需要说明的是,第二定时时长与第三定时时长可以相同,也可以不同,对此不作限定。In some other embodiments, the second timing duration may be configured on the first network device and the second network device, and the third timing duration may be configured on the terminal device. The second timing duration may be pre-defined through the protocol, or configured in other ways. The third timing duration may be pre-defined through the protocol, may also be configured by the network device, or configured in other ways. For example, the network device may be the first network device or the second network device. For example, the second timing duration and the third timing duration may be pre-configured with PDCP configuration parameters. It should be noted that the second timing duration and the third timing duration may be the same or different, which is not limited.
以终端设备接收到第一数据包为例,终端设备当接收到第一数据包后,向第一网络设备发送ACK响应,其中,ACK响应用于指示第一数据包接收成功。第一网络设备接收到ACK响应后,启动第二定时器,在超过第二定时时长后,则向第二网络设备通知取消在第二传输路径上发送第二数据包。而终端设备当向第一网络设备发送ACK响应后,则启动第三定时器,如果在第三定时时长内接收到第二网络设备在第二传输路径上发送的第二数据包,则对第二数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第二校验结果。如果超过第三定时时长仍未接收到第二数据包,当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验成功时,则不触 发RRC连接重建立;当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验失败时,则触发RRC连接重建立。Taking the terminal device receiving the first data packet as an example, after receiving the first data packet, the terminal device sends an ACK response to the first network device, where the ACK response is used to indicate that the first data packet is successfully received. After receiving the ACK response, the first network device starts the second timer, and after the second timing period is exceeded, it notifies the second network device to cancel sending the second data packet on the second transmission path. After the terminal device sends an ACK response to the first network device, it starts the third timer. If the second data packet sent by the second network device on the second transmission path is received within the third timing period, it will Perform integrity protection verification on the second data packet to obtain a second verification result. If the second data packet is not received after the third timing duration, when the first check result indicates that the integrity protection check of the first data packet is successful, the RRC connection re-establishment is not triggered; when the first check result indicates the first data packet When a data packet integrity protection check fails, the RRC connection re-establishment is triggered.
当终端设备接收到第二数据包时的终端设备的处理方法,可以参见终端设备接收到第一数据包的处理方法,在此不再赘述。For the processing method of the terminal device when the terminal device receives the second data packet, refer to the processing method of the terminal device receiving the first data packet, which will not be repeated here.
在AM场景下,当网络设备向终端设备发送的下行数据进行duplication操作时,即通过第一传输路径发送第一数据包,通过第二传输路径发送第二数据包。示例的,对于终端设备来说,当第一网络设备为MN时,第一网络设备在第一数据包的PDCP PDU中携带指示信息,用于指示终端设备在第一传输路径和第二传输路径上接收该PDCP PDU。可以理解的,由于第二数据包与第一数据包相同,因此第二数据包也携带该指示信息。可选的上述指示信息可以包含在PDCP头中。当终端设备接收到第一数据包或第二数据包时,通过指示信息获知该数据包进行了复制操作,并且需要通过不同传输路径接收相同的数据包。In an AM scenario, when a network device performs a duplication operation on downlink data sent to a terminal device, the first data packet is sent through the first transmission path, and the second data packet is sent through the second transmission path. For example, for a terminal device, when the first network device is an MN, the first network device carries indication information in the PDCP PDU of the first data packet to indicate that the terminal device is on the first transmission path and the second transmission path To receive the PDCP PDU. It can be understood that since the second data packet is the same as the first data packet, the second data packet also carries the indication information. The optional above indication information may be included in the PDCP header. When the terminal device receives the first data packet or the second data packet, it learns through the indication information that the data packet has undergone a copy operation, and needs to receive the same data packet through different transmission paths.
此外,对于采用CA的通信系统来说,RAN设备与终端设备之间可以通过多个载波进行通信,其中,终端设备发起初始接入的载波为主载波,主载波上的小区为主小区,其它载波为辅载波,辅载波上的小区为辅小区。因此,在采用CA的通信系统中,一个无线承载也可以关联两个或多个传输路径,其中一个无线承载关联的不同的传输路径所关联的小区或载波是不同的。如果在采用CA的通信系统中,引入duplication操作后,也可以在一个无线承载关联的两个或多个传输路径上可以传输相同的数据包。In addition, for a communication system using CA, RAN equipment and terminal equipment can communicate through multiple carriers. Among them, the carrier where the terminal equipment initiates initial access is the primary carrier, the cell on the primary carrier is the primary cell, and the other The carrier is the secondary carrier, and the cell on the secondary carrier is the secondary cell. Therefore, in a communication system using CA, one radio bearer can also be associated with two or more transmission paths, and different transmission paths associated with one radio bearer are associated with different cells or carriers. If in a communication system using CA, after the duplication operation is introduced, the same data packet can also be transmitted on two or more transmission paths associated with a radio bearer.
以图6所示的网络架构为例,RAN设备在RRC层为终端设备配置RB。例如,RB关联第一传输路径和第二传输路径,其中第一传输路径关联的载波与第二传输路径关联的载波不同。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,第一传输路径关联的载波,可以理解为第一传输路径关联的小区;第二传输路径关联的载波,可以理解为第二传输路径关联的小区。Taking the network architecture shown in FIG. 6 as an example, the RAN device configures the RB for the terminal device at the RRC layer. For example, the RB is associated with the first transmission path and the second transmission path, wherein the carrier associated with the first transmission path is different from the carrier associated with the second transmission path. It should be noted that, in this embodiment of the application, the carrier associated with the first transmission path can be understood as a cell associated with the first transmission path; the carrier associated with the second transmission path can be understood as a cell associated with the second transmission path.
示例的,第一传输路径关联的第一载波组,第二传输路径关联第二载波组,第一载波组包括至少一个第一载波,第二载波组包括至少一个第二载波,至少一个第一载波中每个第一载波与至少一个第二载波中每个载波均不相同。例如,第一载波组包括载波11、载波12和载波13,第二载波组包括载波21、和载波22。其中,载波11、载波12、载波13均与载波21、载波22为不同的载波。需要说明的是,RAN设备在RRC层为终端设备配置的RB可以为SRB1、SRB2、DRB等。应理解,与主载波关联的传输路径又可以称之为主传输路径,其它传输路径为辅传输路径。例如,第一传输路径关联的第一载波组,第二传输路径关联第二载波组,第一载波组中包括主载波,则第一传输路径为主传输路径,叠传输路径为辅传输路径。以SRB1和/或SRB2配置了CA duplication(针对上行)为例,终端设备需要在SRB1关联的第一传输路径和第二传输路径上接收下行RRC消息。示例的,如图7所示,为本申请实施例的一种通信方法,包括以下步骤。For example, the first carrier group is associated with the first transmission path, the second carrier group is associated with the second transmission path, the first carrier group includes at least one first carrier, the second carrier group includes at least one second carrier, and at least one first carrier Each first carrier in the carrier is different from each carrier in the at least one second carrier. For example, the first carrier group includes carrier 11, carrier 12, and carrier 13, and the second carrier group includes carrier 21 and carrier 22. Among them, carrier 11, carrier 12, and carrier 13 are all different carriers from carrier 21 and carrier 22. It should be noted that the RB configured by the RAN device for the terminal device at the RRC layer may be SRB1, SRB2, DRB, etc. It should be understood that the transmission path associated with the primary carrier may also be referred to as the primary transmission path, and other transmission paths are secondary transmission paths. For example, if the first carrier group is associated with the first transmission path, the second carrier group is associated with the second transmission path, and the primary carrier is included in the first carrier group, the first transmission path is the primary transmission path, and the overlapping transmission path is the secondary transmission path. Taking SRB1 and/or SRB2 configured with CA duplication (for uplink) as an example, the terminal device needs to receive downlink RRC messages on the first transmission path and the second transmission path associated with SRB1. As an example, as shown in FIG. 7, a communication method according to an embodiment of this application includes the following steps.
步骤701,终端设备的配置了第一传输路径和第二传输路径,并可以通过第一传输路径和第二传输路径进行数据包接收。示例性的,终端设备为SRBx建立第一传输路径和第二传输路径,例如,第一传输路径为第一RLC bearer,第二传输路径为第二RLC bearer,每个RLC bearer分别关联一个小区组。或者,终端设备为SRBx建立第一RLC bearer,为SRBy建立第二RLC bearer,第一RLC bearer和第二RLC bearer分别关联一个小区组,终端设备通过上述第一RLC bear关联的小区组和第二RLC bearer关联的小区组接收下行数据包。示例性的,所述SRBx/SRBy可以为SRB1或SRB2,此时数据包可以指承载在该SRB上的RRC消息。Step 701: The terminal device is configured with a first transmission path and a second transmission path, and can receive data packets through the first transmission path and the second transmission path. Exemplarily, the terminal device establishes a first transmission path and a second transmission path for SRBx. For example, the first transmission path is a first RLC bearer, and the second transmission path is a second RLC bearer, and each RLC bearer is associated with a cell group. . Alternatively, the terminal device establishes a first RLC bearer for SRBx and a second RLC bearer for SRBy. The first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer are respectively associated with a cell group, and the terminal device uses the cell group and the second RLC bearer associated with the first RLC bearer. The cell group associated with the RLC bearer receives the downlink data packet. Exemplarily, the SRBx/SRBy may be SRB1 or SRB2. In this case, the data packet may refer to the RRC message carried on the SRB.
步骤702,终端设备通过第三传输路径接收到第一数据包,并对第一数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果。例如,终端设备的PDCP层对该第一数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果。其中,第三传输路径为第一传输路径和第二传输路径中的一个。示例性的,第一数据包可以为承载在SRB1或SRB2的RRC消息。在一些实施例中,终端设备获知第一数据包没有进行复制操作。可以理解的,终端设备可以通过接收网络设备发送的显示的指示信息获知第一数据包或第一数据包所属的承载没有配置下行复制操作,或者终端设备可以通过隐式的方式获知,例如没有收到网络设备发送的为第一数据包或第一数据包所属的承载配置了下行复制操作的指示信息。Step 702: The terminal device receives the first data packet through the third transmission path, and performs integrity protection verification on the first data packet to obtain a first verification result. For example, the PDCP layer of the terminal device performs integrity protection verification on the first data packet to obtain the first verification result. Wherein, the third transmission path is one of the first transmission path and the second transmission path. Exemplarily, the first data packet may be an RRC message carried in SRB1 or SRB2. In some embodiments, the terminal device learns that the first data packet has not been copied. It is understandable that the terminal device can learn that the first data packet or the bearer to which the first data packet belongs is not configured with a downlink copy operation by receiving the displayed indication information sent by the network device, or the terminal device can learn in an implicit way, for example, that the bearer to which the first data packet belongs is not configured. The instruction information sent to the network device that the first data packet or the bearer to which the first data packet belongs is configured with a downlink copy operation.
在一些实施例中,图7所示的通信方法中包括步骤703,当第一校验结果用于指示第一数据包完整性保护校验失败时,终端设备的PDCP层向上层发送指示信息,用于指示上层发生了完整性保护校验失败。所述指示信息还包含第三传输路径的指示信息,用于指示上层通过第三传输路径接收的数据包发生了完整性保护校验失败。示例性的,上层为RRC层。示例性的,第三传输路径的指示信息为第三传输路径的标识,或第三传输路径关联的小区标识信息。In some embodiments, the communication method shown in FIG. 7 includes step 703. When the first check result is used to indicate that the first data packet integrity protection check fails, the PDCP layer of the terminal device sends indication information to the upper layer, It is used to indicate that the integrity protection check failure of the upper layer has occurred. The indication information also includes indication information of the third transmission path, which is used to indicate that the data packet received by the upper layer through the third transmission path has an integrity protection check failure. Exemplarily, the upper layer is the RRC layer. Exemplarily, the indication information of the third transmission path is an identifier of the third transmission path, or cell identification information associated with the third transmission path.
在另一些实施例中,图7所示的通信方法中还包括步骤704,终端设备通过第四传输路径发送失败报告,该失败报告用于指示该终端设备发生了完整性保护校验失败。其中,第四传输路径为第一传输路径和第二传输路径中的一个,并且与第三传输路径不同。示例的,终端设备通过第四传输路径向网络设备发送失败报告。需要说明的是,终端设备接收第一数据包的RLC bearer和终端设备发送失败报告的RLC bearer可以不属于同一个承载也可以属于同一个承载,本申请不做限制。例如终端设备从SRB2或SRB1的一个RLC bearer接收到第一数据包,都可以通过SRB1一个RLC bearer发送失败报告,只要上述两个RLC bearer关联的传输路径(即小区或小区组)不同。In other embodiments, the communication method shown in FIG. 7 further includes step 704. The terminal device sends a failure report through the fourth transmission path, and the failure report is used to indicate that the terminal device has failed the integrity protection verification. Wherein, the fourth transmission path is one of the first transmission path and the second transmission path, and is different from the third transmission path. For example, the terminal device sends a failure report to the network device through the fourth transmission path. It should be noted that the RLC bearer that the terminal device receives the first data packet and the RLC bearer that the terminal device sends the failure report may not belong to the same bearer or may belong to the same bearer, which is not limited in this application. For example, when the terminal device receives the first data packet from one RLC bearer of SRB2 or SRB1, it can send a failure report through one RLC bearer of SRB1, as long as the transmission paths (ie, cells or cell groups) associated with the two RLC bearers are different.
在本实施例中,提供了一种通信方法,使得终端设备可以在配置了两个或多个传输路径的情况下,终端设备在一个传输路径上接收的数据包完整性保护校验失败时,可以通过另一个传输路径向RAN设备发送指示信息,从而使得RAN设备进行相应的处理。In this embodiment, a communication method is provided, so that when two or more transmission paths are configured for a terminal device, when the integrity protection verification of a data packet received by the terminal device on one transmission path fails, The indication information can be sent to the RAN device through another transmission path, so that the RAN device performs corresponding processing.
以RB关联第一传输路径和第二传输路径为例,如图8所示,为本申请实施例的一种通信方法,包括以下步骤:Taking the RB associating the first transmission path and the second transmission path as an example, as shown in FIG. 8, a communication method according to an embodiment of this application includes the following steps:
步骤801,RAN设备通过第一传输路径向终端设备发送第一数据包,通过第二传输路径向终端设备发送第二数据包,其中,第一数据包和第二数据包相同。Step 801: The RAN device sends a first data packet to the terminal device through a first transmission path, and sends a second data packet to the terminal device through a second transmission path, where the first data packet and the second data packet are the same.
需要说明的是,第一数据包与第二数据包相同,可以理解为第一数据包可以是RAN设备对第二数据包复制得到的,或者,第二数据包是RAN设备对第一数据包复制得到的。It should be noted that the first data packet is the same as the second data packet. It can be understood that the first data packet can be obtained by copying the second data packet by the RAN device, or the second data packet is the first data packet from the RAN device. Copy it.
另外,还需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,第一传输路径和第二传输路径中其中一个传输路径关联主载波。例如,第一传输路径关联第一载波组,第二传输路径关联第二载波组,第一载波组包括主载波,则第一传输路径关联主载波,因此,第一传输路径为主传输路径,第二传输路径为辅传输路径。In addition, it should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, one of the first transmission path and the second transmission path is associated with the primary carrier. For example, if the first transmission path is associated with the first carrier group, the second transmission path is associated with the second carrier group, and the first carrier group includes the anchor carrier, the first transmission path is associated with the anchor carrier. Therefore, the first transmission path is the main transmission path, The second transmission path is the auxiliary transmission path.
步骤802,终端设备当接收到来自第一传输路径的第一数据包后,对第一数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果;当接收到来自第二传输路径的第二数据包后,对第二数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第二校验结果。Step 802: After receiving the first data packet from the first transmission path, the terminal device performs integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain the first check result; when receiving the second data packet from the second transmission path After the data packet, integrity protection verification is performed on the second data packet to obtain a second verification result.
步骤803,当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验成功,第二校验结果指示第二数据包完整性保护校验失败时,终端设备通过第一传输路径向RAN设备发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示所述第二数据包完整性保护校验失败。Step 803: When the first verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the first data packet is successful, and the second verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the second data packet fails, the terminal device transmits to the RAN device through the first transmission path The first indication information is used to indicate that the integrity protection check of the second data packet fails.
需要说明的是,对于终端设备来说,在第二传输路径关联主载波的情况下,当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验成功,第二校验结果指示第二数据包完整性保护校验失败时,终端设备还可以不向RAN设备发送第一指示信息,而是触发RRC连接的重建立。示例的,对于终端设备来说,当第二传输路径关联主载波时,如果第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验成功,第二校验结果指示第二数据包完整性保护校验失败,则终端设备是通过第一传输路径向RAN设备发送第一指示信息,还是触发RRC连接的重建立,可以根据预先配置的策略或规则确定。例如,如果终端设备中预先配置的策略为当与主载波关联的传输路径上的数据包完整性保护校验失败,而与不与主载波关联的传输路径上的数据包完整性保护校验成功,则通过与不与主载波关联的传输路径上向RAN设备发送指示信息,则当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验成功,第二校验结果指示第二数据包完整性保护校验失败时,终端设备通过第一传输路径向RAN设备发送第一指示信息。再例如,如果终端设备中预先配置的策略为当与主载波关联的传输路径上的数据包完整性保护校验失败,而不与主载波关联的传输路径上的数据包完整性保护校验成功,则触发RRC连接的重建立,则当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验成功,第二校验结果指示第二数据包完整性保护校验失败时,终端设备触发RRC连接的重建立。上述仅为举例说明,不构成对本申请实施例的限定。It should be noted that, for the terminal device, when the second transmission path is associated with the primary carrier, when the first check result indicates that the first data packet integrity protection check succeeds, the second check result indicates the second data When the packet integrity protection check fails, the terminal device may also not send the first indication information to the RAN device, but trigger the re-establishment of the RRC connection. For example, for the terminal device, when the second transmission path is associated with the primary carrier, if the first check result indicates that the first data packet integrity protection check is successful, the second check result indicates the second data packet integrity protection If the verification fails, whether the terminal device sends the first indication information to the RAN device through the first transmission path or triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection can be determined according to a pre-configured policy or rule. For example, if the pre-configured policy in the terminal device is when the data packet integrity protection verification on the transmission path associated with the primary carrier fails, and the data packet integrity protection verification on the transmission path not associated with the primary carrier succeeds , The indication information is sent to the RAN device through the transmission path not associated with the primary carrier, then when the first check result indicates that the integrity protection check of the first data packet is successful, the second check result indicates that the second data packet is complete When the sexual protection check fails, the terminal device sends the first indication information to the RAN device through the first transmission path. For another example, if the pre-configured policy in the terminal device is when the data packet integrity protection verification on the transmission path associated with the primary carrier fails, and the data packet integrity protection verification on the transmission path not associated with the primary carrier succeeds , The re-establishment of the RRC connection is triggered, and when the first verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the first data packet is successful, and the second verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the second data packet fails, the terminal device triggers the RRC Re-establishment of the connection. The foregoing is only an example, and does not constitute a limitation to the embodiments of the present application.
在一些实施例中,当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验成功,第二校验结果指示第二数据包完整性保护校验失败时,终端设备还可以通过第一传输路径向RAN设备发送用于指示第二传输路径的信息、和/或与第二传输路径关联的一个或多个小区标识,该一个或多个小区标识可以用于指示发送第二数据包所使用的小区。从而有助于提高RAN侧判定对终端设备的第二数据包完整性保护校验失败时进行处理的方式的合理性。示例的,第一指示信息包括用于指示第二传输路径的信息、和/或与第二传输路径对应的小区标识等,从而有助于节省信令开销。In some embodiments, when the first check result indicates that the integrity protection check of the first data packet is successful, and the second check result indicates that the integrity protection check of the second data packet fails, the terminal device may also pass the first transmission The path sends information indicating the second transmission path and/or one or more cell identities associated with the second transmission path to the RAN device, and the one or more cell identities may be used to indicate the use of sending the second data packet Of the cell. This helps to improve the rationality of the way the RAN side determines that the integrity protection check of the second data packet of the terminal device fails. For example, the first indication information includes information used to indicate the second transmission path, and/or a cell identifier corresponding to the second transmission path, etc., thereby helping to save signaling overhead.
在一些实施例中,对于终端设备来说,如果RAN设备接收到的第一指示信息,则RAN设备可以向终端设备发送切换指令。其中,切换指令用于触发终端设备更新所使用的用于完整性保护的密钥、和/或用于完整性保护的算法。从而使得终端设备能够在接收到切换指令后,更新所使用的完整性保护密钥和/或算法即可,无需再发起RRC连接的重建立,有助于降低RRC连接的重建立的次数,提高用户体验。示例的,RAN设备可以通过第一传输路径向终端设备发送切换指令。有助于简化实现方式,提高通信效率。In some embodiments, for the terminal device, if the RAN device receives the first indication information, the RAN device may send a handover instruction to the terminal device. The switching instruction is used to trigger the terminal device to update the key used for integrity protection and/or the algorithm used for integrity protection. Therefore, the terminal device can update the used integrity protection key and/or algorithm after receiving the handover instruction, without initiating the re-establishment of the RRC connection, which helps to reduce the number of re-establishment of the RRC connection and increase user experience. For example, the RAN device may send a handover instruction to the terminal device through the first transmission path. It helps to simplify implementation and improve communication efficiency.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,触发终端设备更新所使用的用于完整性保护的密钥、和/或用于完整性保护的算法,可以理解为触发终端设备更新RAN设备和终端设备之间空口通信所使用的用于完整性保护的密钥、和/或RAN设备和终端设备之间空口通信所使用的用于完整性保护的算法。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the key used for integrity protection and/or the algorithm used for integrity protection used to trigger the terminal device to update can be understood as triggering the terminal device to update the RAN device and the terminal device. The key used for integrity protection for air interface communication between each other, and/or the algorithm for integrity protection used for air interface communication between the RAN device and the terminal device.
在一些实施例中,当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验失败,第二校验结果指示第二数据包完整性保护校验失败时,终端设备触发RRC连接的重建立。从而有助于使得终端设备通信恢复正常。In some embodiments, when the first verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the first data packet fails, and the second verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the second data packet fails, the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection . This helps to make the terminal device communication back to normal.
然而,对于终端设备来说,第一数据包和第二数据包分别是通过不同的传输路径传输的,有可能终端设备已经接收到了RAN设备通过第二传输路径发送的第二数据包,而RAN设备还未通过第一传输路径向终端设备发送第一数据包。对于AM场景来说,如果终端设备接收第二数据包成功,则会向RAN设备发送ACK响应,指示终端设备接收第二数据包成功,RAN设备为避免重复发送,可以在确定终端设备接收第二数据包成功后,取消第一数据包的发送。但是,对于终端设备来说是不感知的,而如果终端设备采用图6所示的通信方法时,需要参考两个数据包的完整性校验结果,来决定是触发RRC连接的重建立,还是发送第一指示信息。However, for the terminal device, the first data packet and the second data packet are transmitted through different transmission paths. It is possible that the terminal device has received the second data packet sent by the RAN device through the second transmission path, and the RAN The device has not sent the first data packet to the terminal device through the first transmission path. For the AM scenario, if the terminal device successfully receives the second data packet, it will send an ACK response to the RAN device, indicating that the terminal device has successfully received the second data packet. In order to avoid repeated transmissions, the RAN device can confirm that the terminal device receives the second data packet. After the data packet is successful, the sending of the first data packet is cancelled. However, it is not perceptible to the terminal device, and if the terminal device uses the communication method shown in Figure 6, it needs to refer to the integrity check results of the two data packets to determine whether to trigger the re-establishment of the RRC connection or Send the first instruction message.
因此,为了使得终端设备在接收到第一数据包和第二数据包其中一个数据包后,便于判断是否继续等待接收另一数据包,在一些实施例中,可以在终端设备中预先配置第一定时时长,其中第一定时时长可以是通过协议预先定义的,也可以是由RAN设备配置的,还可以是通过其它方式配置的。例如,第一定时时长可以以PDCP的配置参数预先配置在终端设备中。Therefore, in order to enable the terminal device to determine whether to continue to receive another data packet after receiving one of the first data packet and the second data packet, in some embodiments, the first data packet may be pre-configured in the terminal device. The timing duration, where the first timing duration may be predefined through a protocol, may also be configured by the RAN device, or may be configured in other ways. For example, the first timing duration may be pre-configured in the terminal device with PDCP configuration parameters.
示例的,终端设备当接收到RAN设备在第一传输路径上发送的第一数据包后,对第一数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果,并在得到第一校验结果时如果还没有接收到第二数据包,则启动第一定时器,若在第一定时时长内终端设备接收到第二数据包,则对第二数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第二校验结果。示例的,终端设备根据第一校验结果和第二校验结果判断是否触发RRC连接的重建立的具体实现方式,可以参见上述相关实施例,在此不再赘述。For example, after receiving the first data packet sent by the RAN device on the first transmission path, the terminal device performs an integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain the first check result, and after obtaining the first check As a result, if the second data packet has not been received, the first timer is started. If the terminal device receives the second data packet within the first timing period, the integrity protection check is performed on the second data packet to obtain the first timer. 2. Check result. For example, the specific implementation manner for the terminal device to determine whether to trigger the re-establishment of the RRC connection according to the first check result and the second check result can be referred to the above-mentioned related embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
又示例的,终端设备当接收到RAN设备在第一传输路径上发送的第一数据包后,对第一数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果,并在得到第一校验结果时如果还没有接收到第二数据包,则启动第一定时器,若超过第一定时时长后,终端设备仍未接收的RAN设备在第二传输路径上发送的第二数据包,则当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验成功时,不触发RRC连接的重建立。As another example, after receiving the first data packet sent by the RAN device on the first transmission path, the terminal device performs an integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain the first check result, and after obtaining the first check In the verification result, if the second data packet has not been received, the first timer is started. If the terminal device has not yet received the second data packet sent by the RAN device on the second transmission path after the first timing period is exceeded, then When the first check result indicates that the first data packet integrity protection check succeeds, the re-establishment of the RRC connection is not triggered.
需要说明的是,终端设备超过第一定时时长后仍未接收到第二数据包,当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性校验成功时,不触发RRC连接的重建立,可以理解为,终端设备超过第一定时时长后仍未接收到第二数据包,当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性校验成功时后续执行的步骤,可以参见现有技术中当第一校验结果和第二校验结果均指示数据包完整性校验成功时终端设备后续执行的步骤;也可以理解为,终端设备超过第一定时时长后仍未接收到第二数据包,当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性校验成功时,向RAN设备发送为接收到第二数据包的指示。It should be noted that the terminal device has not received the second data packet after exceeding the first timing period, and when the first check result indicates that the integrity check of the first data packet is successful, the RRC connection re-establishment is not triggered, which is understandable Therefore, the terminal device has not received the second data packet after the first timing period, and when the first check result indicates that the integrity check of the first data packet is successful, refer to the first step in the prior art. The verification result and the second verification result both indicate the subsequent steps performed by the terminal device when the integrity check of the data packet is successful; it can also be understood that the terminal device has not received the second data packet after the first timing period. When a check result indicates that the integrity check of the first data packet is successful, an indication that the second data packet is received is sent to the RAN device.
在另外一些实施例中,还可以在RAN设备配置第二定时时长,在终端设备配置第三定时时长。其中第二定时时长可以是通过协议预先定义,也可以是通过其它方式配置的,第三定时时长可以是通过协议预先定义的,也可以是由RAN设备配置的,还可以通过其它方式配置。例如,第二定时时长、第三定时时长可以以PDCP的配置参数预先配置。需要说明的是,第二定时时长与第三定时时长可以相同,也可以不同,对此不作限定。In some other embodiments, the second timing duration may be configured in the RAN device, and the third timing duration may be configured in the terminal device. The second timing duration may be pre-defined through a protocol or configured in other ways. The third timing duration may be pre-defined through a protocol, or configured by the RAN device, or configured through other methods. For example, the second timing duration and the third timing duration may be pre-configured with PDCP configuration parameters. It should be noted that the second timing duration and the third timing duration may be the same or different, which is not limited.
以终端设备接收到第一数据包为例,终端设备当接收到第一数据包后,向RAN设备发送ACK响应,其中,ACK响应用于指示第一数据包接收成功。RAN设备接收到ACK响应后,启动第二定时器,在超过第二定时时长后,则向RAN设备通知取消在第二传输路径上发送第二数据包。而终端设备当向RAN设备发送ACK响应后,则启动第三定时器, 如果在第三定时时长内接收到RAN设备在第二传输路径上发送的第二数据包,则对第二数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第二校验结果。如果超过第三定时时长仍未接收到第二数据包,当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验成功时,则不触发RRC连接重建立;当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验失败时,则触发RRC连接重建立。Taking the terminal device receiving the first data packet as an example, after receiving the first data packet, the terminal device sends an ACK response to the RAN device, where the ACK response is used to indicate that the first data packet is successfully received. After receiving the ACK response, the RAN device starts the second timer, and after the second timing period is exceeded, it notifies the RAN device to cancel sending the second data packet on the second transmission path. After the terminal device sends an ACK response to the RAN device, it starts the third timer. If the second data packet sent by the RAN device on the second transmission path is received within the third timing period, the second data packet is processed. The integrity protection check, and the second check result is obtained. If the second data packet is not received after the third timing duration, when the first check result indicates that the integrity protection check of the first data packet is successful, the RRC connection re-establishment is not triggered; when the first check result indicates the first data packet When a data packet integrity protection check fails, the RRC connection re-establishment is triggered.
当终端设备接收到第二数据包时的处理方法,可以参见终端设备接收到第一数据包的处理方法,在此不再赘述。For the processing method when the terminal device receives the second data packet, refer to the processing method when the terminal device receives the first data packet, which will not be repeated here.
在AM场景下,当RAN设备向终端设备发送的下行数据进行duplication操作时,即通过第一传输路径发送第一数据包,通过第二传输路径发送第二数据包。示例的,RAN设备在第一数据包的PDCP PDU中携带指示信息,用于指示终端设备在第一传输路径和第二传输路径上接收该PDCP PDU。可以理解的,由于第二数据包与第一数据包相同,因此第二数据包也携带该指示信息。可选的上述指示信息可以包含在PDCP头中。当终端设备接收到第一数据包或第二数据包时,通过指示信息获知该数据包进行了复制操作,并且需要通过两个传输路径接收相同的数据包。In the AM scenario, when the RAN device performs a duplication operation on the downlink data sent by the terminal device, the first data packet is sent through the first transmission path, and the second data packet is sent through the second transmission path. For example, the RAN device carries indication information in the PDCP PDU of the first data packet, which is used to instruct the terminal device to receive the PDCP PDU on the first transmission path and the second transmission path. It can be understood that since the second data packet is the same as the first data packet, the second data packet also carries the indication information. The optional above indication information may be included in the PDCP header. When the terminal device receives the first data packet or the second data packet, it learns through the indication information that the data packet has undergone a copy operation, and needs to receive the same data packet through two transmission paths.
需要说明的是,当同时采用了MR-DC和CA的通信系统中,引入duplication操作后,对于不同传输路径上发送的相同的数据包来说,终端设备如果接收到的来自某一个或多个传输路径上的数据包的完整性保护校验失败时,可以通过用于发送完整性保护校验成功的数据包的传输路径,向RAN设备(例如MN或SN)发送指示信息,从而使得RAN设备可以进行相应的处理,与终端设备在某个传输路径上的数据包完整性校验失败时,则触发RRC连接的重建立相比,有助于降低终端设备触发RRC连接的重建立的次数,提高通信性能。在具体实现时,可以将图5所示的通信方法与图8所示的通信方法相结合使用,在此不在赘述。It should be noted that when the MR-DC and CA communication systems are used at the same time, after the introduction of duplication operation, for the same data packet sent on different transmission paths, if the terminal device receives from one or more When the integrity protection check of the data packet on the transmission path fails, the transmission path used to send the data packet with successful integrity protection check can send indication information to the RAN device (such as MN or SN), so that the RAN device Corresponding processing can be performed. Compared with the triggering of the re-establishment of the RRC connection when the terminal device fails to check the integrity of the data packet on a certain transmission path, it helps to reduce the number of times the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection. Improve communication performance. In specific implementation, the communication method shown in FIG. 5 can be used in combination with the communication method shown in FIG. 8, which will not be repeated here.
本申请上述图5和图8所示的通信方法,仅以两个传输路径为例进行的介绍,本申请实施例当配置了dupliaction的无线承载关联两个以上的传输路径时,其通信方法可以参见两个传输路径时的通信方法,在此不再赘述。The communication methods shown in Figs. 5 and 8 of the present application are introduced only by taking two transmission paths as an example. In the embodiment of the present application, when a radio bearer configured with dupliaction is associated with two or more transmission paths, the communication method can be Refer to the communication method in the case of two transmission paths, which will not be repeated here.
对于采用了CA的通信系统来说,终端设备与RAN设备可以通过多个载波进行通信,其中,终端设备发起初始接入的载波为主载波,主载波上的小区为主小区,其它载波为辅载波,辅载波上的小区为辅小区。现有技术中,终端设备进行主小区物理层检测,一旦终端设备的物理层检测到主小区异常,例如T310超时,则向RRC层上报主小区物理层异常当主小区物理层异常时,然后由RRC层触发RRC连接的重建立。容易导致终端设备中断时间较长,影响用户体验。For a communication system using CA, terminal equipment and RAN equipment can communicate through multiple carriers. Among them, the carrier where the terminal equipment initiates initial access is the primary carrier, the cell on the primary carrier is the primary cell, and other carriers are secondary. Carrier, the cell on the secondary carrier is the secondary cell. In the prior art, the terminal device detects the physical layer of the primary cell. Once the physical layer of the terminal device detects the primary cell abnormality, for example, T310 times out, it will report the primary cell physical layer abnormality to the RRC layer. When the primary cell physical layer is abnormal, the RRC The layer triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection. It is easy to cause the terminal equipment to be interrupted for a long time and affect the user experience.
有鉴于此,本申请实施例又提供了一种通信方法,能够使得终端设备在主小区物理层检测异常时,有助于使得终端设备可以通过其他可以正常工作的辅小区向RAN设备发送指示主小区物理层异常的指示信息,从而使得RAN设备可以进行相应的处理,例如指示终端设备切换到其他小区,与终端设备在主小区物理层异常时,则触发RRC连接的重建立相比,有助于降低终端设备触发RRC连接的重建立的次数,提高通信性能。In view of this, the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, which enables the terminal device to detect an abnormality in the physical layer of the primary cell, which helps to enable the terminal device to send instructions to the RAN device through other secondary cells that can work normally. The indication information of the physical layer of the cell is abnormal, so that the RAN device can perform corresponding processing, such as instructing the terminal device to switch to another cell, which is helpful compared with triggering the re-establishment of the RRC connection when the terminal device is abnormal in the physical layer of the primary cell In order to reduce the number of times that the terminal device triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection, and improve the communication performance.
示例的,如图9所示,本申请实施例一种通信方法,包括以下步骤。As an example, as shown in FIG. 9, a communication method in an embodiment of the present application includes the following steps.
步骤901,终端设备通过主小区和/或M个辅小区与RAN设备进行通信,其中,主小区的载波和M个辅小区中每个辅小区的载波不同,M为大于或等于1的正整数。Step 901: The terminal device communicates with the RAN device through the primary cell and/or M secondary cells, where the carrier of the primary cell is different from the carrier of each of the M secondary cells, and M is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1. .
例如,以M的取值为3为例,M个辅小区的载波分别为载波1、载波2和载波3,主小区的载波为载波0,其中载波1、载波2和载波3均与载波0不同。For example, taking the value of M as 3, the carriers of the M secondary cells are carrier 1, carrier 2, and carrier 3 respectively, and the carrier of the primary cell is carrier 0, and carrier 1, carrier 2, and carrier 3 are all related to carrier 0. different.
步骤902,当主小区物理层异常时,终端设备通过M个辅小区中的N个辅小区向RAN设备发送第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示主小区物理层异常。其中,1≤N≤M、且所述N为正整数。Step 902: When the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, the terminal device sends second indication information to the RAN device through N secondary cells of the M secondary cells, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal. Wherein, 1≤N≤M, and the N is a positive integer.
需要说明的是,N个辅小区为M个辅小区中正常工作的辅小区,能够用于终端设备与RAN设备之间的正常通信。例如,以M取值为5为例,M个辅小区分别为小区1、小区2、小区3、小区4和小区5,如果小区1、小区2、小区3、小区4和小区5中,小区3、小区4和小区5能够用于终端设备与RAN设备之间的正常通信,则终端设备可以通过小区3、小区4和小区5中的一个或多个小区向RAN设备发送第二指示信息。It should be noted that the N secondary cells are normally working secondary cells among the M secondary cells, and can be used for normal communication between the terminal device and the RAN device. For example, taking the value of M as 5, the M secondary cells are cell 1, cell 2, cell 3, cell 4, and cell 5 respectively. If cell 1, cell 2, cell 3, cell 4, and cell 5, cell 3. Cells 4 and 5 can be used for normal communication between the terminal device and the RAN device, then the terminal device can send the second indication information to the RAN device through one or more of the cell 3, cell 4, and cell 5.
步骤903,RAN设备在接收到终端设备通过N个辅小区发送的第二指示信息后,向所述终端设备发送切换指令;该切换指令用于指示终端设备切换到其它小区。Step 903: After receiving the second instruction information sent by the terminal device through the N secondary cells, the RAN device sends a handover instruction to the terminal device; the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to another cell.
需要说明的是,该切换指令用于指示终端设备切换到其它小区,可以理解为,该切换指令指示终端设备将主小区切换到其它小区。示例的,如果切换指令指示的其它小区为M个辅小区中的一个,则为小区内切换,如果切换指令指示的其它小区为其它RAN设备的提供的小区,则为RAN设备切换。It should be noted that the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to another cell, and it can be understood that the handover instruction instructs the terminal device to switch the primary cell to another cell. For example, if the other cell indicated by the handover instruction is one of the M secondary cells, it is an intra-cell handover, and if the other cell indicated by the handover instruction is a cell provided by another RAN device, it is a RAN device handover.
示例的,RAN设备可以通过终端设备发送第二指示信息所使用的N个辅小区向终端设备发送切换指令,也可以通过M个辅小区中的其它能够正常工作的辅小区向终端设备发送切换指令,对此不作限定。For example, the RAN device may send a handover instruction to the terminal device through the N secondary cells used by the terminal device to send the second indication information, or may send a handover instruction to the terminal device through other secondary cells that can work normally among the M secondary cells , There is no restriction on this.
在一些实施例中,终端设备还可以通过M个辅小区中的K个辅小区向RAN设备发送第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示备选主小区组,终备选主小区组包括M辅小区中的至少一个辅小区,其中,1≤K≤M、且所述K为正整数。从而有助于辅助RAN设备确定用于指示终端设备将主小区切换到哪个小区。应理解,备选主小区组包括的M个辅小区中至少一个辅小区为能够正常工作的辅小区。In some embodiments, the terminal device may also send third indication information to the RAN device through K of the M secondary cells. The third indication information is used to indicate the candidate primary cell group, and the final candidate primary cell group includes At least one secondary cell in the M secondary cells, where 1≤K≤M, and the K is a positive integer. This helps the auxiliary RAN device to determine which cell to instruct the terminal device to switch the primary cell to. It should be understood that at least one of the M secondary cells included in the candidate primary cell group is a secondary cell that can work normally.
需要说明的是第二指示信息和第三指示信息可以携带在一个信令中,也可以分别携带在不同的信令中,对此不作限定。It should be noted that the second indication information and the third indication information may be carried in one signaling, and may also be carried in different signaling, which is not limited.
步骤904,终端设备接收到切换指令后,根据切换指令,切换到其它小区。Step 904: After receiving the handover instruction, the terminal device switches to another cell according to the handover instruction.
现有技术中,对于采用了CA和MR-DC的通信系统来说,终端设备进行主小区物理层检测,一旦终端设备的物理层检测到主小区异常,例如T310超时,则向RRC层上报主小区物理层异常当主小区物理层异常时,然后由RRC层触发RRC连接的重建立。容易导致终端设备中断时间较长,影响用户体验。In the prior art, for a communication system using CA and MR-DC, the terminal device performs primary cell physical layer detection. Once the physical layer of the terminal device detects an abnormality in the primary cell, such as T310 timeout, it reports the primary cell to the RRC layer. Cell physical layer abnormality When the primary cell physical layer is abnormal, then the RRC layer triggers the re-establishment of the RRC connection. It is easy to cause the terminal equipment to be interrupted for a long time and affect user experience.
有鉴于此,本申请又提供了一种通信方法。下面以第一网络设备为终端设备的MN,第二网络设备为终端设备的SN为例,对本申请实施例进行介绍。In view of this, this application provides another communication method. Hereinafter, the embodiments of the present application will be introduced by taking the MN where the first network device is the terminal device and the SN where the second network device is the terminal device as an example.
在一些实施例中,当主小区物理层异常时,终端设备若无法通过MN的辅小区与MN进行通信,则可以通过与SN之间的传输路径向MN发送第二指示信息,其中,第二指示信息用于指示主小区物理层异常。MN在接收到第二指示信息后,将切换指令发送给SN,由SN通过与终端设备之间的传输路径,将切换指令发送给终端设备,以使得终端设备能够将主小区切换到其它小区。其中,切换指令用于指示终端设备切换到其它小区。In some embodiments, when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, if the terminal device cannot communicate with the MN through the secondary cell of the MN, it can send the second indication information to the MN through the transmission path with the SN, where the second indication The information is used to indicate that the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal. After receiving the second instruction information, the MN sends a handover instruction to the SN, and the SN sends the handover instruction to the terminal device through the transmission path with the terminal device, so that the terminal device can switch the primary cell to another cell. Among them, the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal equipment to switch to other cells.
需要说明的是,终端设备无法通过MN的辅小区与MN进行通信可以包括以下情况,MN未向终端设备提供辅小区,即MN仅能通过主小区与MN通信;或者,MN向终端设备提供了M个辅小区,其中M为大于或等于1的正整数,但M辅小区均发生异常,不能用于终端设备与MN之间的通信。It should be noted that the terminal device’s inability to communicate with the MN through the MN’s secondary cell may include the following situations. The MN does not provide the terminal device with a secondary cell, that is, the MN can only communicate with the MN through the primary cell; or, the MN provides the terminal device with M secondary cells, where M is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1, but all M secondary cells are abnormal and cannot be used for communication between the terminal device and the MN.
示例的,当主小区物理层异常时,终端设备若无法通过MN的辅小区与MN进行通信,则还可以通过与SN之间的传输路径向MN发送第三指示信息用于指示终端设备的备选主小区组,备选主小区组包括M辅小区中的至少一个辅小区,其中,1≤K≤M、且所述K为正整数。从而有助于辅助RAN设备确定用于指示终端设备将主小区切换到哪个小区。应理解,备选主小区组包括的M个辅小区中至少一个辅小区为能够正常工作的辅小区。For example, when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, if the terminal device cannot communicate with the MN through the secondary cell of the MN, it can also send third indication information to the MN through the transmission path between the SN and the SN to indicate the alternative of the terminal device. The primary cell group, the candidate primary cell group includes at least one secondary cell among the M secondary cells, where 1≤K≤M, and the K is a positive integer. This helps the auxiliary RAN device to determine which cell to instruct the terminal device to switch the primary cell to. It should be understood that at least one of the M secondary cells included in the candidate primary cell group is a secondary cell that can work normally.
需要说明的是第二指示信息和第三指示信息可以携带在一个信令中,也可以分别携带在不同的信令中,对此不作限定。It should be noted that the second indication information and the third indication information may be carried in one signaling, and may also be carried in different signaling, which is not limited.
在另一些实施例中,当主小区物理层异常时,若终端设备可以通过MN的M个辅小区与MN进行通信,也可以通过SN与终端设备之间传输路径与终端设备进行通信时,则终端设备可以通过M个辅小区中的N个辅小区、和/或与SN之间的传输路径向MN发送第二指示信息,其中,第二指示信息用于指示主小区物理层异常。其中,M为大于或等于1的正整数,1≤N≤M、且N为正整数。MN在接收到第二指示信息后,向终端设备发送切换指令。切换指令用于指示终端设备切换到其它小区。In other embodiments, when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, if the terminal device can communicate with the MN through the M secondary cells of the MN, or communicate with the terminal device through the transmission path between the SN and the terminal device, the terminal The device may send the second indication information to the MN through the N secondary cells among the M secondary cells and/or the transmission path with the SN, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal. Wherein, M is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1, 1≤N≤M, and N is a positive integer. After receiving the second indication information, the MN sends a handover instruction to the terminal device. The handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal equipment to switch to other cells.
示例的,MN向终端设备发送切换指令的所使用的传输路径,可以与终端设备向MN发送第二指示信息的传输路径相同,也可以不同。例如,终端设备向MN发送第二指示信息的传输路径为SN与终端设备之间的传输路径,MN向终端设备发送切换指令的所使用的传输路径可以为M辅小区中的K个辅小区。1≤K≤M、且N为正整数。For example, the transmission path used by the MN to send the handover instruction to the terminal device may be the same as or different from the transmission path used by the terminal device to send the second indication information to the MN. For example, the transmission path for the terminal device to send the second indication information to the MN is the transmission path between the SN and the terminal device, and the transmission path used for the MN to send the handover instruction to the terminal device may be K secondary cells in the M secondary cells. 1≤K≤M, and N is a positive integer.
示例的,当主小区物理层异常时,若终端设备可以通过MN的M个辅小区与MN进行通信,也可以通过SN与终端设备之间传输路径与终端设备进行通信时,则终端设备可以通过M个辅小区中的S个辅小区、和/或与SN之间的传输路径向MN发送第三指示信息用于指示备选主小区组,终备选主小区组包括M辅小区中的至少一个辅小区,从而有助于辅助RAN设备确定用于指示终端设备将主小区切换到哪个小区。应理解,备选主小区组包括的M个辅小区中至少一个辅小区为能够正常工作的辅小区。For example, when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, if the terminal device can communicate with the MN through the M secondary cells of the MN, or communicate with the terminal device through the transmission path between the SN and the terminal device, the terminal device can communicate with the terminal device through the M The S secondary cells in the two secondary cells and/or the transmission path with the SN sends third indication information to the MN to indicate the candidate primary cell group, and the final candidate primary cell group includes at least one of the M secondary cells Secondary cell, thereby helping the auxiliary RAN device to determine which cell to instruct the terminal device to switch the primary cell to. It should be understood that at least one of the M secondary cells included in the candidate primary cell group is a secondary cell that can work normally.
本申请各个实施例可以单独使用,也可以相互结合使用,以达到不同的技术效果。The various embodiments of the present application can be used alone or in combination with each other to achieve different technical effects.
上述本申请提供的实施例中,从终端设备和网络设备作为执行主体的角度对本申请实施例提供的通信方法进行了介绍。为了实现上述本申请实施例提供的通信方法中的各功能,终端设备或网络设备可以包括硬件结构和/或软件模块,以硬件结构、软件模块、或硬件结构加软件模块的形式来实现上述各功能。上述各功能中的某个功能以硬件结构、软件模块、还是硬件结构加软件模块的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。In the above-mentioned embodiments provided in the present application, the communication method provided in the embodiments of the present application is introduced from the perspective of terminal devices and network devices as execution subjects. In order to realize each function in the communication method provided in the above embodiments of the present application, the terminal device or the network device may include a hardware structure and/or software module, and the above various functions are implemented in the form of a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module. Features. Whether one of the above-mentioned functions is executed in a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution.
与上述构思相同,如图10所示,本申请实施例还提供一种装置1000,该装置1000包括收发模块1002和处理模块1001。Similar to the above-mentioned concept, as shown in FIG. 10, an embodiment of the present application further provides an apparatus 1000, which includes a transceiver module 1002 and a processing module 1001.
一示例中,装置1000用于实现上述图4或图4所示的通信方法中终端设备的功能。该装置可以是终端设备,也可以是终端设备中的装置。其中,该装置可以为芯片系统。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In an example, the apparatus 1000 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the communication method shown in FIG. 4 or FIG. 4. The device can be a terminal device or a device in a terminal device. Among them, the device may be a chip system. In the embodiments of the present application, the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
其中,收发模块1002用于从第一传输路径接收第一数据包;处理模块1001用于对所述第一数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果;当所述第一校验结果指示所述第一数据包完整性保护校验失败时,收发模块1002用于通过第二传输路径发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示完整性保护校验失败和所述第一传输路径的信息。Wherein, the transceiver module 1002 is used to receive the first data packet from the first transmission path; the processing module 1001 is used to perform integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain the first check result; when the first check When the verification result indicates that the integrity protection check of the first data packet fails, the transceiver module 1002 is configured to send first indication information through the second transmission path, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the integrity protection check fails and the integrity protection check fails. The information of the first transmission path.
一示例中,装置1000用于实现上述图5或图8所示的通信方法中终端设备的功能。该装置可以是终端设备,也可以是终端设备中的装置。其中,该装置可以为芯片系统。本 申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In an example, the apparatus 1000 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the communication method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 8. The device can be a terminal device or a device in a terminal device. Among them, the device may be a chip system. In the embodiments of the present application, the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
其中,收发模块1002用于接收第一网络设备通过第一传输路径发送的第一数据包,以及接收第二网络设备通过第二传输路径发送的第二数据包;处理模块1001用于当收发模块1002接收到所述第一数据包时,对所述第一数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果;以及当收发模块1002接收到所述第二数据包时,对所述第二数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第二校验结果;然后,收发模块1002还用于当所述第一校验结果指示所述第一数据包完整性保护校验成功、所述第二校验结果指示所述第二数据包完整性保护校验失败时,通过所述第一传输路径向所述第一网络设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二数据包完整性保护校验失败。其中,所述第一数据包和所述第二数据包相同。The transceiver module 1002 is used to receive a first data packet sent by a first network device through a first transmission path, and receive a second data packet sent by a second network device through a second transmission path; the processing module 1001 is used as a transceiver module When receiving the first data packet, 1002 performs integrity protection verification on the first data packet to obtain a first verification result; and when the transceiver module 1002 receives the second data packet, performs a verification on the Perform integrity protection verification on the second data packet to obtain a second verification result; then, the transceiver module 1002 is further configured to: when the first verification result indicates that the integrity protection verification of the first data packet is successful, the When the second check result indicates that the second data packet integrity protection check fails, first indication information is sent to the first network device through the first transmission path, and the first indication information is used to indicate all The integrity protection verification of the second data packet fails. Wherein, the first data packet and the second data packet are the same.
一示例中,装置1000用于实现上述图5所示的方法中第一网络设备的功能或者用于实现上述图8所述的通信方法中RAN设备的功能。该装置可以是网络设备,也可以是网络设备中的装置。其中,该装置可以为芯片系统。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In an example, the apparatus 1000 is used to implement the function of the first network device in the method shown in FIG. 5 or is used to implement the function of the RAN device in the communication method described in FIG. 8. The device can be a network device or a device in a network device. Among them, the device may be a chip system. In the embodiments of the present application, the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
其中,收发模块1002用于通过第一传输路径向终端设备发送第一数据包,以及通过第二传输路径向所述终端设备发送第二数据包;所述第一数据包和所述第二数据包相同;处理模块1001还用于当收发模块1002接收到终端设备发送的第一指示信息时,触发收发模块1002通过第一传输路径向终端设备发送切换指令;其中,第一指示信息用于指示第二数据包完整性保护校验失败,切换指令用于触发终端设备更新所使用的用于完整性保护的密钥、和/或用于完整性保护的算法。The transceiver module 1002 is configured to send a first data packet to the terminal device through a first transmission path, and send a second data packet to the terminal device through a second transmission path; the first data packet and the second data The package is the same; the processing module 1001 is also used to trigger the transceiver module 1002 to send a switching instruction to the terminal device through the first transmission path when the transceiver module 1002 receives the first instruction information sent by the terminal device; wherein, the first instruction information is used to indicate The integrity protection verification of the second data packet fails, and the switching instruction is used to trigger the terminal device to update the key used for integrity protection and/or the algorithm used for integrity protection.
一示例中,装置1000用于实现上述图9示的方法中终端设备的功能。该装置可以是终端设备,也可以是终端设备中的装置。其中,该装置可以为芯片系统。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In an example, the apparatus 1000 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the method shown in FIG. 9 above. The device can be a terminal device or a device in a terminal device. Among them, the device may be a chip system. In the embodiments of the present application, the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
其中,收发模块1002用于通过主小区和/或M个辅小区与第一网络设备进行通信,所述主小区的载波与所述M个辅小区中每个辅小区的载波不同;所述M为大于或等于1的正整数;Wherein, the transceiver module 1002 is configured to communicate with the first network device through a primary cell and/or M secondary cells, and the carrier of the primary cell is different from the carrier of each secondary cell of the M secondary cells; Is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1;
处理模块1001用于当主小区物理层异常时,通过M个辅小区中的N个辅小区向第一网络设备发送第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示主小区物理层异常;其中,1≤N≤M、且所述N为正整数;The processing module 1001 is configured to send first indication information to the first network device through N secondary cells of the M secondary cells when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, where the first indication information is used to indicate the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal; ≤N≤M, and the N is a positive integer;
收发模块1002还用于通过N个辅小区接收第一网络设备在接收到第一指示信息后发送的切换指令,该切换指令用于指示所述终端设备切换到其它小区。The transceiver module 1002 is further configured to receive a handover instruction sent by the first network device after receiving the first indication information through the N secondary cells, and the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to another cell.
一示例中,装置1000用于实现上述图9示的方法中RAN设备的功能。该装置可以是网络设备,也可以是网络设备中的装置。其中,该装置可以为芯片系统。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In an example, the apparatus 1000 is used to implement the function of the RAN device in the method shown in FIG. 9 above. The device can be a network device or a device in a network device. Among them, the device may be a chip system. In the embodiments of the present application, the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
其中,收发模块1002用于通过主小区和/或M个辅小区与终端设备进行通信,主小区的载波与M个辅小区中每个辅小区的载波不同;M为大于或等于1的正整数;Wherein, the transceiver module 1002 is used to communicate with the terminal device through the primary cell and/or M secondary cells. The carrier of the primary cell is different from the carrier of each secondary cell of the M secondary cells; M is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1. ;
处理模块1001用于当通过所述M个辅小区中的N个辅小区接收到终端设备发送的第一指示信息时,触发收发模块1002通过所述N个辅小区向所述终端设备发送切换指令;The processing module 1001 is configured to trigger the transceiver module 1002 to send a handover instruction to the terminal device through the N secondary cells when the first indication information sent by the terminal device is received through the N secondary cells of the M secondary cells ;
其中,1≤N≤M、且所述N为正整数,第一指示信息用于指示主小区物理层异常,切换指令用于指示终端设备切换到其它小区。Wherein, 1≤N≤M, and the N is a positive integer, the first indication information is used to indicate that the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, and the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to another cell.
关于处理模块1001、收发模块1002的具体执行过程,可参见上方法实施例中的记载。本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能模块可以集成在一个处理器中,也可以是单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上模块集成在一个模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。For the specific execution process of the processing module 1001 and the transceiver module 1002, please refer to the record in the above method embodiment. The division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. In addition, the functional modules in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one process. In the device, it can also exist alone physically, or two or more modules can be integrated into one module. The above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional modules.
与上述构思相同,如图11所示,本申请实施例还提供一种装置1100。Similar to the above-mentioned concept, as shown in FIG. 11, an embodiment of the present application further provides an apparatus 1100.
一示例中,该装置1100用于实现上述图4或图4所述的通信方法中终端设备的功能,该装置可以是终端设备,也可以是终端设备中的装置。装置1100包括至少一个处理器1101,用于实现上述图4或图7所示的通信方法中终端设备的功能。示例地,处理器1101可以用于对第一数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果。具体参见方法中的详细描述,此处不再说明。In an example, the device 1100 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the communication method described in FIG. 4 or FIG. 4, and the device may be a terminal device or a device in a terminal device. The apparatus 1100 includes at least one processor 1101, configured to implement the function of the terminal device in the communication method shown in FIG. 4 or FIG. 7. For example, the processor 1101 may be configured to perform integrity protection verification on the first data packet to obtain the first verification result. For details, please refer to the detailed description in the method, which will not be explained here.
在一些实施例中,装置1100还可以包括至少一个存储器1102,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。存储器1102和处理器1101耦合。本申请实施例中的耦合是装置、单元或模块之间的间隔耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式,用于装置、单元或模块之间的信息交互。作为另一种实现,存储器1102还可以位于装置1100之外。处理器1101可以和存储器1102协同操作。处理器1101可能执行存储器1102中存储的程序指令。所述至少一个存储器中的至少一个可以包括于处理器中。In some embodiments, the apparatus 1100 may further include at least one memory 1102 for storing program instructions and/or data. The memory 1102 and the processor 1101 are coupled. The coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an interval coupling or a communication connection between devices, units or modules, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules. As another implementation, the memory 1102 may also be located outside the apparatus 1100. The processor 1101 may operate in cooperation with the memory 1102. The processor 1101 may execute program instructions stored in the memory 1102. At least one of the at least one memory may be included in the processor.
在一些实施例中,装置1100还可以包括通信接口1103,用于通过传输介质和其它设备进行通信,从而用于装置1100中的装置可以和其它设备进行通信。示例性地,通信接口1103可以是收发器、电路、总线、模块或其它类型的通信接口,该其它设备可以是第二终端设备或网络设备。处理器1101利用通信接口1103收发数据,并用于实现上述实施例中的方法。示例性的,通信接口1103,可以用于发送第一指示信息。In some embodiments, the apparatus 1100 may further include a communication interface 1103 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that the apparatus used in the apparatus 1100 can communicate with other devices. Exemplarily, the communication interface 1103 may be a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, or another type of communication interface, and the other device may be a second terminal device or a network device. The processor 1101 uses the communication interface 1103 to send and receive data, and is used to implement the method in the foregoing embodiment. Exemplarily, the communication interface 1103 may be used to send the first indication information.
一示例中,该装置1100用于实现上述图5或图8所述的通信方法中终端设备的功能,该装置可以是终端设备,也可以是终端设备中的装置。装置1100包括至少一个处理器1101,用于实现上述图5或图8所示的通信方法中终端设备的功能。示例地,处理器1101可以用于当第一校验结果指示第一数据包完整性保护校验成功、第二校验结果指示第二数据包完整性保护校验失败时,通过第一传输路径向第一网络设备发送第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示第二数据包完整性保护校验失败。其中,第一数据包和所述第二数据包相同。具体参见方法中的详细描述,此处不再说明。In an example, the device 1100 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the communication method described in FIG. 5 or FIG. 8. The device may be a terminal device or a device in a terminal device. The apparatus 1100 includes at least one processor 1101, configured to implement the function of the terminal device in the communication method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 8. For example, the processor 1101 may be configured to pass the first transmission path when the first verification result indicates that the first data packet integrity protection verification succeeds, and the second verification result indicates that the second data packet integrity protection verification fails. Send first indication information to the first network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the integrity protection check of the second data packet fails. Wherein, the first data packet is the same as the second data packet. For details, please refer to the detailed description in the method, which will not be explained here.
在一些实施例中,装置1100还可以包括至少一个存储器1102,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。存储器1102和处理器1101耦合。本申请实施例中的耦合是装置、单元或模块之间的间隔耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式,用于装置、单元或模块之间的信息交互。作为另一种实现,存储器1102还可以位于装置1100之外。处理器1101可以和存储器1102协同操作。处理器1101可能执行存储器1102中存储的程序指令。所述至少一个存储器中的至少一个可以包括于处理器中。In some embodiments, the apparatus 1100 may further include at least one memory 1102 for storing program instructions and/or data. The memory 1102 and the processor 1101 are coupled. The coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an interval coupling or a communication connection between devices, units or modules, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules. As another implementation, the memory 1102 may also be located outside the apparatus 1100. The processor 1101 may operate in cooperation with the memory 1102. The processor 1101 may execute program instructions stored in the memory 1102. At least one of the at least one memory may be included in the processor.
在一些实施例中,装置1100还可以包括通信接口1103,用于通过传输介质和其它设备进行通信,从而用于装置1100中的装置可以和其它设备进行通信。示例性地,通信接口1103可以是收发器、电路、总线、模块或其它类型的通信接口,该其它设备可以是第二终端设备或网络设备。处理器1101利用通信接口1103收发数据,并用于实现上述实施例中的方法。示例性的,通信接口1103,可以用于发送第一指示信息。In some embodiments, the apparatus 1100 may further include a communication interface 1103 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that the apparatus used in the apparatus 1100 can communicate with other devices. Exemplarily, the communication interface 1103 may be a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, or another type of communication interface, and the other device may be a second terminal device or a network device. The processor 1101 uses the communication interface 1103 to send and receive data, and is used to implement the method in the foregoing embodiment. Exemplarily, the communication interface 1103 may be used to send the first indication information.
一示例中,该装置1100用于实现上述装置1000用于实现上述图5所示的方法中第一网络设备的功能或者用于实现上述图8所述的通信方法中RAN设备的功能。该装置可以是网络设备,也可以是网络设备中的装置。装置1100至少一个处理器1101,用于实现上述方法中网络设备的功能。示例地,处理器1101可以用于在收发模块1102接收到第一指示信息后,触发收发模块1102向终端设备发送切换指令,具体参见方法中的详细描述,此处不再说明。In an example, the apparatus 1100 is used to implement the above-mentioned apparatus 1000 for implementing the function of the first network device in the method shown in FIG. 5 or for implementing the function of the RAN device in the communication method described in FIG. 8. The device can be a network device or a device in a network device. The apparatus 1100 has at least one processor 1101, configured to implement the function of the network device in the foregoing method. For example, the processor 1101 may be configured to trigger the transceiver module 1102 to send a handover instruction to the terminal device after the transceiver module 1102 receives the first indication information. For details, refer to the detailed description in the method, which will not be described here.
在一些实施例中,装置1100还可以包括至少一个存储器1102,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。存储器1102和处理器1101耦合。本申请实施例中的耦合是装置、单元或模块之间的间隔耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式,用于装置、单元或模块之间的信息交互。作为另一种实现,存储器1102还可以位于装置1100之外。处理器1101可以和存储器1102协同操作。处理器1101可能执行存储器1102中存储的程序指令。所述至少一个存储器中的至少一个可以包括于处理器中。In some embodiments, the apparatus 1100 may further include at least one memory 1102 for storing program instructions and/or data. The memory 1102 and the processor 1101 are coupled. The coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an interval coupling or a communication connection between devices, units or modules, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules. As another implementation, the memory 1102 may also be located outside the apparatus 1100. The processor 1101 may operate in cooperation with the memory 1102. The processor 1101 may execute program instructions stored in the memory 1102. At least one of the at least one memory may be included in the processor.
在一些实施例中,装置1100还可以包括通信接口1103,用于通过传输介质和其它设备进行通信,从而用于装置1100中的装置可以和其它设备进行通信。示例性地,通信接口1103可以是收发器、电路、总线、模块或其它类型的通信接口,该其它设备可以是第二终端设备或网络设备。处理器1101利用通信接口1103收发数据,并用于实现上述实施例中的方法。示例性的,通信接口1103,可以用于接收第一指示信息,发送切换指令等。In some embodiments, the apparatus 1100 may further include a communication interface 1103 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that the apparatus used in the apparatus 1100 can communicate with other devices. Exemplarily, the communication interface 1103 may be a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, or another type of communication interface, and the other device may be a second terminal device or a network device. The processor 1101 uses the communication interface 1103 to send and receive data, and is used to implement the method in the foregoing embodiment. Exemplarily, the communication interface 1103 may be used to receive the first indication information, send a switching instruction, and so on.
一示例中,该装置1100用于实现上述图9所述的通信方法中终端设备的功能,该装置可以是终端设备,也可以是终端设备中的装置。装置1100包括至少一个处理器1101,用于实现上述图9所示的通信方法中终端设备的功能。示例地,处理器1101可以用于当主小区物理层异常时,触发通过所述M个辅小区中的N个辅小区向所述第一网络设备发送第一指示信息。具体参见方法中的详细描述,此处不再说明。In an example, the device 1100 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the communication method described in FIG. 9 above, and the device may be a terminal device or a device in a terminal device. The apparatus 1100 includes at least one processor 1101, configured to implement the function of the terminal device in the communication method shown in FIG. 9 above. For example, the processor 1101 may be configured to, when the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, trigger to send the first indication information to the first network device through N secondary cells among the M secondary cells. For details, please refer to the detailed description in the method, which will not be explained here.
在一些实施例中,装置1100还可以包括至少一个存储器1102,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。存储器1102和处理器1101耦合。本申请实施例中的耦合是装置、单元或模块之间的间隔耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式,用于装置、单元或模块之间的信息交互。作为另一种实现,存储器1102还可以位于装置1100之外。处理器1101可以和存储器1102协同操作。处理器1101可能执行存储器1102中存储的程序指令。所述至少一个存储器中的至少一个可以包括于处理器中。In some embodiments, the apparatus 1100 may further include at least one memory 1102 for storing program instructions and/or data. The memory 1102 and the processor 1101 are coupled. The coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an interval coupling or a communication connection between devices, units or modules, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules. As another implementation, the memory 1102 may also be located outside the apparatus 1100. The processor 1101 may operate in cooperation with the memory 1102. The processor 1101 may execute program instructions stored in the memory 1102. At least one of the at least one memory may be included in the processor.
在一些实施例中,装置1100还可以包括通信接口1103,用于通过传输介质和其它设备进行通信,从而用于装置1100中的装置可以和其它设备进行通信。示例性地,通信接口1103可以是收发器、电路、总线、模块或其它类型的通信接口,该其它设备可以是第二终端设备或网络设备。处理器1101利用通信接口1103收发数据,并用于实现上述实施例中的方法。示例性的,通信接口1103,可以用于发送第一指示信息。In some embodiments, the apparatus 1100 may further include a communication interface 1103 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that the apparatus used in the apparatus 1100 can communicate with other devices. Exemplarily, the communication interface 1103 may be a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, or another type of communication interface, and the other device may be a second terminal device or a network device. The processor 1101 uses the communication interface 1103 to send and receive data, and is used to implement the method in the foregoing embodiment. Exemplarily, the communication interface 1103 may be used to send the first indication information.
一示例中,该装置1100用于实现上述装置1000用于实现上述图9所示的方法中RAN设备的功能。该装置可以是网络设备,也可以是网络设备中的装置。装置1100至少一个处理器1101,用于实现上述方法中第二终端设备的功能。示例地,处理器1101可以用于在接收到第一指示信息后,触发向终端设备发送切换指令,具体参见方法中的详细描述,此处不再说明。In an example, the apparatus 1100 is used to implement the foregoing apparatus 1000 for implementing the function of the RAN device in the method shown in FIG. 9. The device can be a network device or a device in a network device. The apparatus 1100 has at least one processor 1101 configured to implement the function of the second terminal device in the foregoing method. For example, the processor 1101 may be configured to trigger sending a handover instruction to the terminal device after receiving the first indication information. For details, refer to the detailed description in the method, which will not be described here.
在一些实施例中,装置1100还可以包括至少一个存储器1102,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。存储器1102和处理器1101耦合。本申请实施例中的耦合是装置、单元或模块之 间的间隔耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式,用于装置、单元或模块之间的信息交互。作为另一种实现,存储器1102还可以位于装置1100之外。处理器1101可以和存储器1102协同操作。处理器1101可能执行存储器1102中存储的程序指令。所述至少一个存储器中的至少一个可以包括于处理器中。In some embodiments, the apparatus 1100 may further include at least one memory 1102 for storing program instructions and/or data. The memory 1102 and the processor 1101 are coupled. The coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an interval coupling or a communication connection between devices, units or modules, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules. As another implementation, the memory 1102 may also be located outside the apparatus 1100. The processor 1101 may operate in cooperation with the memory 1102. The processor 1101 may execute program instructions stored in the memory 1102. At least one of the at least one memory may be included in the processor.
在一些实施例中,装置1100还可以包括通信接口1103,用于通过传输介质和其它设备进行通信,从而用于装置1100中的装置可以和其它设备进行通信。示例性地,通信接口1103可以是收发器、电路、总线、模块或其它类型的通信接口,该其它设备可以是第二终端设备或网络设备。处理器1101利用通信接口1103收发数据,并用于实现上述实施例中的方法。示例性的,通信接口1103,可以用于接收第一指示信息,发送切换指令等。In some embodiments, the apparatus 1100 may further include a communication interface 1103 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that the apparatus used in the apparatus 1100 can communicate with other devices. Exemplarily, the communication interface 1103 may be a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, or another type of communication interface, and the other device may be a second terminal device or a network device. The processor 1101 uses the communication interface 1103 to send and receive data, and is used to implement the method in the foregoing embodiment. Exemplarily, the communication interface 1103 may be used to receive the first indication information, send a switching instruction, and so on.
本申请实施例中不限定上述通信接口1103、处理器1101以及存储器1102之间的连接介质。例如,本申请实施例在图11中以存储器1102、处理器1101以及通信接口1103之间可以通过总线连接,所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。The embodiment of the present application does not limit the connection medium between the foregoing communication interface 1103, the processor 1101, and the memory 1102. For example, in the embodiment of the present application in FIG. 11, the memory 1102, the processor 1101, and the communication interface 1103 may be connected by a bus, and the bus may be divided into an address bus, a data bus, and a control bus.
在本申请实施例中,处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器、专用集成电路、现场可编程门阵列或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件,可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。In the embodiments of the present application, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, a discrete hardware component, and may implement or Perform the methods, steps, and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
在本申请实施例中,存储器可以是非易失性存储器,比如硬盘(hard disk drive,HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive,SSD)等,还可以是易失性存储器(volatile memory),例如随机存取存储器(random-access memory,RAM)。存储器是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,但不限于此。本申请实施例中的存储器还可以是电路或者其它任意能够实现存储功能的装置,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。In the embodiment of the present application, the memory may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), etc., or a volatile memory (volatile memory), for example Random-access memory (random-access memory, RAM). The memory is any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited thereto. The memory in the embodiments of the present application may also be a circuit or any other device capable of realizing a storage function, for storing program instructions and/or data.
本申请实施例提供的方法中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本发明实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、网络设备、用户设备或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,简称DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机可以存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,数字视频光盘(digital video disc,简称DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,SSD)等。The methods provided in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present invention are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a dedicated computer, a computer network, network equipment, user equipment, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website, computer, server, or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center integrated with one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD for short)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, SSD).
显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the application without departing from the scope of the application. In this way, if these modifications and variations of this application fall within the scope of the claims of this application and their equivalent technologies, this application also intends to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (31)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
    终端设备接收第一网络设备通过第一传输路径发送的第一数据包,以及接收第二网络设备通过第二传输路径发送的第二数据包;其中,所述第一数据包和所述第二数据包相同;The terminal device receives the first data packet sent by the first network device through the first transmission path, and receives the second data packet sent by the second network device through the second transmission path; wherein, the first data packet and the second data packet The data packets are the same;
    所述终端设备当接收到所述第一数据包时,对所述第一数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果;以及当接收到所述第二数据包时,对所述第二数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第二校验结果;When receiving the first data packet, the terminal device performs an integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain a first check result; and when receiving the second data packet, performs an integrity protection check on the first data packet; Performing integrity protection verification on the second data packet to obtain a second verification result;
    当所述第一校验结果指示所述第一数据包完整性保护校验成功、所述第二校验结果指示所述第二数据包完整性保护校验失败时,所述终端设备通过所述第一传输路径向所述第一网络设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第二数据包完整性保护校验失败。When the first check result indicates that the first data packet integrity protection check succeeds, and the second check result indicates that the second data packet integrity protection check fails, the terminal device passes all The first transmission path sends first indication information to the first network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the integrity protection check of the second data packet fails.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 1, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备接收所述第一网络设备在接收到所述第一指示信息后通过所述第一传输路径发送的切换指令;所述切换指令用于触发所述终端设备更新所使用的用于完整性保护的密钥、和/或用于完整性保护的算法。The terminal device receives the switching instruction sent by the first network device through the first transmission path after receiving the first indication information; the switching instruction is used to trigger the terminal device to update the The key for integrity protection and/or the algorithm used for integrity protection.
  3. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息还包括用于指示所述第二传输路径的信息、和/或与所述第二传输路径对应的小区标识,所述与所述第二传输路径对应的小区标识用于指示发送所述第二数据包所使用的小区。The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first indication information further includes information for indicating the second transmission path and/or a cell identifier corresponding to the second transmission path, The cell identifier corresponding to the second transmission path is used to indicate a cell used for sending the second data packet.
  4. 如权利要求1至3任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述与所述第一传输路径关联的载波和与所述第二传输路径关联的载波不同。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the carrier associated with the first transmission path is different from the carrier associated with the second transmission path.
  5. 如权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述与所述第一传输路径关联的载波包括主载波。The method according to claim 4, wherein the carrier associated with the first transmission path includes a primary carrier.
  6. 如权利要求1至5任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一网络设备和所述第二网络设备相同,或者所述第一网络设备和所述第二网络设备为双连接。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the first network device and the second network device are the same, or the first network device and the second network device are dual-connected.
  7. 如权利要求1至6任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备得到所述第一校验结果后,若超过第一定时时长在所述第二传输路径上未接收到所述第二数据包,当所述第一校验结果指示所述第一数据包完整性保护校验成功时,则不触发RRC连接的重建立;或者,After the terminal device obtains the first check result, if the second data packet is not received on the second transmission path beyond the first timing period, when the first check result indicates the first When a data packet integrity protection check succeeds, it does not trigger the re-establishment of the RRC connection; or,
    所述终端设备得到所述第一校验结果后,若超过所述第一定时时长在所述第二传输路径上未接收到所述第二数据包,当所述第一校验结果指示所述第一数据包完整性保护校验失败时,则触发RRC连接的重建立。After the terminal device obtains the first check result, if the second data packet is not received on the second transmission path beyond the first timing duration, when the first check result indicates When the integrity protection check of the first data packet fails, the re-establishment of the RRC connection is triggered.
  8. 如权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一定时时长是预定义的;或者,所述第一定时时长是所述第一网络设备或所述第二网络设备为所述终端设备配置的。The method according to claim 7, wherein the first timing duration is predefined; or, the first timing duration is that the first network device or the second network device is the terminal Equipment configuration.
  9. 如权利要求1至8任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一数据包和所述第二数据包均包括第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示数据包进行了复制操作,且通过不同传输路径接收。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the first data packet and the second data packet both include second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the data packet is Copy operation and receive through different transmission paths.
  10. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
    第一网络设备通过第一传输路径向终端设备发送第一数据包,以及通过第二传输路径向所述终端设备发送第二数据包;所述第一数据包和所述第二数据包相同;The first network device sends a first data packet to the terminal device through a first transmission path, and sends a second data packet to the terminal device through a second transmission path; the first data packet and the second data packet are the same;
    所述第一网络设备当接收到所述终端设备发送的第一指示信息时,通过所述第一传输路径向所述终端设备发送切换指令;When the first network device receives the first indication information sent by the terminal device, sending a switching instruction to the terminal device through the first transmission path;
    其中,所述第一指示信息用于指示第二数据包完整性保护校验失败,所述切换指令用于触发所述终端设备更新所使用的用于完整性保护的密钥、和/或用于完整性保护的算法。The first indication information is used to indicate that the integrity protection verification of the second data packet fails, and the switching instruction is used to trigger the terminal device to update the key used for integrity protection and/or use Algorithm for integrity protection.
  11. 如权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息还包括用于指示所述第二传输路径的信息、和/或与所述第二传输路径对应的小区标识,所述与所述第二传输路径对应的小区标识用于指示发送所述第二数据包所使用的小区。The method according to claim 10, wherein the first indication information further includes information for indicating the second transmission path, and/or a cell identifier corresponding to the second transmission path, the The cell identifier corresponding to the second transmission path is used to indicate a cell used for sending the second data packet.
  12. 如权利要求10或11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述与所述第一传输路径关联的载波和与所述第二传输路径关联的载波不同。The method according to claim 10 or 11, wherein the carrier associated with the first transmission path is different from the carrier associated with the second transmission path.
  13. 如权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述与所述第一传输路径关联的载波包括主载波。The method of claim 12, wherein the carrier associated with the first transmission path includes a primary carrier.
  14. 如权利要求12至13任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二传输路径为第二网络设备与所述终端设备之间的传输路径,所述第一网络设备和所述第二网络设备为双连接。The method according to any one of claims 12 to 13, wherein the second transmission path is a transmission path between a second network device and the terminal device, and the first network device and the second The network equipment is dual-connected.
  15. 如权利要求10至14任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 10 to 14, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述第一网络设备为所述终端设备配置第一定时时长,所述第一定时时长为所述终端设备在得到所述第一校验结果后,在所述第二传输路径上等待接收所述第二数据包的最大时长,所述第一校验结果为所述第一数据包的完整性保护校验结果。The first network device configures a first timing duration for the terminal device, and the first timing duration is that the terminal device waits to receive the terminal device on the second transmission path after obtaining the first verification result. For the maximum duration of the second data packet, the first verification result is an integrity protection verification result of the first data packet.
  16. 如权利要求10至15任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一网络设备通过第一传输路径向终端设备发送第一数据包,以及通过第二传输路径向所述终端设备发送第二数据包,包括:The method according to any one of claims 10 to 15, wherein the first network device sends a first data packet to the terminal device through a first transmission path, and sends a first data packet to the terminal device through a second transmission path. Two data packets, including:
    所述第一网络设备通过所述第一传输路径向所述终端设备发送第一数据包;Sending, by the first network device, a first data packet to the terminal device through the first transmission path;
    所述第一网设备在接收到第一确认应答后,在第二定时时长内通过所述第二传输路径向所述终端设备发送所述第二数据包;After receiving the first confirmation response, the first network device sends the second data packet to the terminal device through the second transmission path within a second timing period;
    所述第一确认应答用于指示所述第一数据包接收成功。The first confirmation response is used to indicate that the first data packet is successfully received.
  17. 如权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 16, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述第一网络设备接收到所述第一确认应答,若超过第二定时时长,则取消通过所述第二传输路径向所述终端设备发送所述第二数据包。The first network device receives the first confirmation response, and if it exceeds a second timing period, cancels sending the second data packet to the terminal device through the second transmission path.
  18. 如权利要求10至17任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一数据包和所述第二数据包均包括第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示数据包进行了复制操作,且通过不同传输路径接收。The method according to any one of claims 10 to 17, wherein the first data packet and the second data packet both include second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the data packet is Copy operation and receive through different transmission paths.
  19. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
    终端设备从第一传输路径接收第一数据包;The terminal device receives the first data packet from the first transmission path;
    所述终端设备对所述第一数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果;The terminal device performs an integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain a first check result;
    当所述第一校验结果指示所述第一数据包完整性保护校验失败时,所述终端设备通过第二传输路径发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示完整性保护校验失败和所述第一传输路径的信息。When the first check result indicates that the first data packet integrity protection check fails, the terminal device sends first indication information through the second transmission path, and the first indication information is used to indicate integrity protection Check failure and the information of the first transmission path.
  20. 如权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备对所述第一数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果,包括:The method of claim 19, wherein the terminal device performs an integrity protection check on the first data packet to obtain a first check result, comprising:
    所述终端设备在分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层对所述第一数据包进行完整性保护校验,得到第一校验结果。The terminal device performs an integrity protection check on the first data packet at the PDCP layer of the packet data convergence protocol to obtain a first check result.
  21. 如权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 20, wherein the method further comprises:
    当所述第一校验结果指示所述第一数据包完整性保护校验失败时,所述终端设备的PDCP层向无线资源控制RRC层传送第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示所述终端设备在所述第一传输路径发生完整性保护校验失败。When the first check result indicates that the first data packet integrity protection check fails, the PDCP layer of the terminal device transmits second indication information to the radio resource control RRC layer, and the second indication information is used to indicate all The terminal device fails the integrity protection verification on the first transmission path.
  22. 如权利要求19至21任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一传输路径关联的小区组为主小区组MCG;The method according to any one of claims 19 to 21, wherein the cell group associated with the first transmission path is a primary cell group MCG;
    所述第二传输路径为与分裂信令无线承载SRB1的辅小区组SCG关联的无线链路控制RLC承载;或者,所述第二传输路径为SRB3的RLC承载。The second transmission path is a radio link control RLC bearer associated with the secondary cell group SCG of the split signaling radio bearer SRB1; or, the second transmission path is an RLC bearer of SRB3.
  23. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
    终端设备通过主小区和/或M个辅小区与第一网络设备进行通信,所述主小区的载波与所述M个辅小区中每个辅小区的载波不同;所述M为大于或等于1的正整数;The terminal device communicates with the first network device through the primary cell and/or M secondary cells, the carrier of the primary cell is different from the carrier of each secondary cell of the M secondary cells; the M is greater than or equal to 1. Positive integer;
    当所述主小区物理层异常时,所述终端设备通过所述M个辅小区中的N个辅小区向所述第一网络设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示主小区物理层异常;其中,1≤N≤M、且所述N为正整数;When the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, the terminal device sends first indication information to the first network device through the N secondary cells of the M secondary cells, and the first indication information is used to indicate the primary The physical layer of the cell is abnormal; where 1≤N≤M, and the N is a positive integer;
    所述终端设备通过所述N个辅小区接收所述第一网络设备在接收到所述第一指示信息后发送的切换指令,所述切换指令用于指示所述终端设备切换到其它小区。The terminal device receives, through the N secondary cells, a handover instruction sent by the first network device after receiving the first indication information, where the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to another cell.
  24. 如权利要求23所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 23, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备通过所述M个辅小区中的K个辅小区向所述第一网络设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端设备的备选主小区组,所述备选主小区组包括所述M辅小区中的至少一个辅小区,其中,1≤K≤M、且所述K为正整数。Sending, by the terminal device, second indication information to the first network device through K of the M secondary cells, where the second indication information is used to indicate the candidate primary cell group of the terminal device, The candidate primary cell group includes at least one secondary cell in the M secondary cells, where 1≤K≤M, and the K is a positive integer.
  25. 如权利要求23或24所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 23 or 24, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备还与第二网络设备通信,所述第一网络设备与所述第二网络设备为双连接;The terminal device also communicates with a second network device, and the first network device and the second network device are dual-connected;
    当所述主小区物理层异常时,所述终端设备若无法通过辅小区与所述第一网络设备进行通信,则通过与所述第二网络设备之间的传输路径向所述第一网络设备发送所述第一指示信息。When the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, if the terminal device is unable to communicate with the first network device through the secondary cell, it will transmit to the first network device through the transmission path with the second network device. Sending the first instruction information.
  26. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
    第一网络设备通过主小区和/或M个辅小区与终端设备进行通信,所述主小区的载波与所述M个辅小区中每个辅小区的载波不同;所述M为大于或等于1的正整数;The first network device communicates with the terminal device through a primary cell and/or M secondary cells, and the carrier of the primary cell is different from the carrier of each secondary cell of the M secondary cells; the M is greater than or equal to 1. Positive integer;
    所述第一网络设备当通过所述M个辅小区中的N个辅小区接收到所述终端设备发送的第一指示信息时,通过所述N个辅小区向所述终端设备发送切换指令;When the first network device receives the first indication information sent by the terminal device through the N secondary cells of the M secondary cells, sending a handover instruction to the terminal device through the N secondary cells;
    其中,1≤N≤M、且所述N为正整数,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述主小区物理层异常,所述切换指令用于指示所述终端设备切换到其它小区。Wherein, 1≤N≤M, and the N is a positive integer, the first indication information is used to indicate that the physical layer of the primary cell is abnormal, and the handover instruction is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to another cell.
  27. 如权利要求26所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 26, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述第一网络设备通过所述M个辅小区中的K个辅小区向所述终端设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端设备的备选主小区组,所述备选主小区组包括所述M辅小区中的至少一个辅小区,其中,1≤K≤M、且所述K为正整数。Sending, by the first network device, second indication information to the terminal device through K of the M secondary cells, where the second indication information is used to indicate the candidate primary cell group of the terminal device, The candidate primary cell group includes at least one secondary cell in the M secondary cells, where 1≤K≤M, and the K is a positive integer.
  28. 如权利要求26或27所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述终端设备还与第二网络设备通信,且所述终端设备若无法通过辅小区与所述第一网络设备进行通信时,所述第一网络设备与所述第二网络设备为双连接,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 26 or 27, wherein when the terminal device also communicates with the second network device, and if the terminal device cannot communicate with the first network device through the secondary cell, the The first network device and the second network device are dual-connected, and the method further includes:
    所述第一网络设备通过与所述第二网络设备之间的传输路径接收所述终端设备发送的所述第一指示信息。The first network device receives the first indication information sent by the terminal device through a transmission path between the first network device and the second network device.
  29. 一种装置,其特征在于,用于实现如权利要求1至28任一项所述的方法。A device characterized by being used to implement the method according to any one of claims 1 to 28.
  30. 一种装置,其特征在于,包括处理器和存储器,所述存储器中存储有指令,所述处理器执行所述指令时,使得所述装置执行权利要求1至28任一项所述的方法。A device, characterized by comprising a processor and a memory, the memory stores instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions, the device executes the method according to any one of claims 1 to 28.
  31. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有指令,当所述指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行权利要求1至28任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, wherein the computer-readable storage medium stores instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 28.
PCT/CN2020/080980 2019-03-29 2020-03-24 Communication method and apparatus WO2020199992A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910253302.2 2019-03-29
CN201910253302.2A CN111757348B (en) 2019-03-29 2019-03-29 Communication method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020199992A1 true WO2020199992A1 (en) 2020-10-08

Family

ID=72664940

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/080980 WO2020199992A1 (en) 2019-03-29 2020-03-24 Communication method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN111757348B (en)
WO (1) WO2020199992A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114362893A (en) * 2020-09-29 2022-04-15 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Data transmitting method, data receiving method, terminal and computer storage medium
CN116801253A (en) * 2022-03-17 2023-09-22 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device
CN115175173A (en) * 2022-05-25 2022-10-11 北京国基科技股份有限公司 Redundant communication system and method

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108924949A (en) * 2017-03-24 2018-11-30 华为技术有限公司 Communication means, device and system in wireless network
CN109068390A (en) * 2018-09-19 2018-12-21 中国联合网络通信集团有限公司 Dual link method for building up and the network equipment
CN109151891A (en) * 2017-06-15 2019-01-04 华为技术有限公司 A kind of communication processing method and communication device
WO2019031915A1 (en) * 2017-08-11 2019-02-14 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Dual-connectivity establishment method and device
CN109417716A (en) * 2017-06-16 2019-03-01 联发科技(新加坡)私人有限公司 The method and apparatus of Data duplication are handled in mobile communication

Family Cites Families (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10433176B2 (en) * 2013-11-11 2019-10-01 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Discarding a duplicate protocol data unit associated with a data transmission via a first signaling radio bearer or a second signaling radio bearer
MX365152B (en) * 2014-01-29 2019-05-24 Huawei Tech Co Ltd Method and device for processing radio link failure.
US20200328854A1 (en) * 2016-06-02 2020-10-15 Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy Apparatus and method for reliable communication in multi-connectivity
US10601535B2 (en) * 2017-03-24 2020-03-24 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for performing SCG re-establishment in dual connectivity in wireless communication system and a device therefor
CN109246839B (en) * 2017-05-05 2023-11-28 华为技术有限公司 Failure processing method, switching method, terminal equipment and network equipment
EP3606134B1 (en) * 2017-07-24 2021-03-31 Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. Methods for processing radio link failure, and terminal device
US10757615B2 (en) * 2017-09-13 2020-08-25 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Radio link failure information for PDCP duplication

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108924949A (en) * 2017-03-24 2018-11-30 华为技术有限公司 Communication means, device and system in wireless network
CN109151891A (en) * 2017-06-15 2019-01-04 华为技术有限公司 A kind of communication processing method and communication device
CN109417716A (en) * 2017-06-16 2019-03-01 联发科技(新加坡)私人有限公司 The method and apparatus of Data duplication are handled in mobile communication
WO2019031915A1 (en) * 2017-08-11 2019-02-14 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Dual-connectivity establishment method and device
CN109068390A (en) * 2018-09-19 2018-12-21 中国联合网络通信集团有限公司 Dual link method for building up and the network equipment

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN111757348B (en) 2023-06-27
CN111757348A (en) 2020-10-09

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP3611995B1 (en) Communication method, communication device and communication system therefor
EP3592097B1 (en) Radio link failure handling method and related product
JP6945659B2 (en) Information processing method and related equipment
CN110622538B (en) Repetition and RLC operation in new radio access technology
US8737294B2 (en) Apparatus and method for handling RLC retransmission failure according to activation status of security mode
WO2020199992A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
TW201935993A (en) Device and method of handling a dual connectivity with base stations
EP4329372A1 (en) Data transmission method and apparatus
WO2017219959A1 (en) Voice scheduling method and device
WO2021062677A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2022152220A1 (en) Processing method, apparatus and system for connection failure information
EP3457754B1 (en) Data transmission method and base station
CN117678173A (en) Time-to-live state triggering and rollback for replication in dual connectivity scenarios
WO2020164510A1 (en) Communication method, communication apparatus, and computer-readable storage medium
WO2022120744A1 (en) Data transmission processing method and related apparatus
KR20230091138A (en) MRO critical scenario determination method, device and device
WO2023011612A1 (en) Mobility management method and communication apparatus
WO2023143323A1 (en) Information processing method and apparatus, and device and storage medium
WO2023138669A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2022222915A1 (en) Signaling sending method and apparatus, and storage medium
WO2022247338A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2024045858A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2023273926A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus under multi-connectivity
WO2022082584A1 (en) Methods and apparatuses for a scg deactivation mechanism and a scg activation mechanism in a mr-dc scenario
US20210076443A1 (en) Information obtaining method and device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20783276

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20783276

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1